MFX-2200 & MFX-2700

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/mfx-2200-mfx-2700 1/393

Muratec

MFX-2700/MFX-2200

FACSIMILE SYSTEM

FIELD ENGINEERING MANUAL

MEG version 1

(12 March 2007)

MURATA MACHINERY, LTDCOMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT DIV.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


Safety Information

LED Safety LabelA LED safety label is attached to the outside of the machine as shown below.

Battery Precautions

Important:Muratec does not recommend the independent replacement of the batteries. The batteriesare sold only as component parts of the Main Control PCB and Voice PCB, and cannot bepurchased separately from Muratec. Ni-MH (Nickel Metal Hydride) batteries are installedinside the machine as back up memory batteries. Be sure to dispose of them according to

local, state and federal regulations.

CAUTIONDanger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

Il y a un danger d'explosion s'il y a un remplacement incorrect de la batterie.Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type ou d'un type recommandé par le

constructeur. Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformement aux instructions du fabricant.

Germany only

VORSICHT!Explosinsgefahr bei unsachgemäßen austausch der Batterie.Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom hersteller empfohlenen ähnlichen typ. Entsorgung

gebrauchter Batterien nach angaben des herstellers.

Denmark onlyADVARSEL!

Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndteringUdskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type.

Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandøren.

Norway only

ADVARSELEksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri.Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten.

Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


Sweden onlyVARNING

Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.

Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.

Finland onlyVAROlTUS

Paristo voi räjähtää, los se on virheellisesti asennettu.

Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin.Hävitä Käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.

ALL AreasCAUTION

“Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.Dispose of used IC Package according to the manufacturer’s instructions.”

Germany onlyVORSICHT!

”Austausch nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen,gleichwertigen typ. Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers.”

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


i

Table of contentsSafety Information ..................................................................................................................................a

1 General Description ................................................................................1-11.1 Product Description .......................................................................................................................1-11.2 Specifications ................................................................................................................................1-3

2 Machine Composition .............................................................................2-12.1 Document Scanning Sequence .....................................................................................................2-22.2 Recording Section .........................................................................................................................2-62.3 Image Processing ..........................................................................................................................2-72.4 Interconnect Block Diagram ........................................................................................................2-202.5 Block diagrams ............................................................................................................................2-222.6 Network Control Unit (NCU) PCB ................................................................................................2-242.7 Low Voltage Power Supply Unit (LVPS) .....................................................................................2-252.8 High Voltage Power Supply ........................................................................................................2-26

3 Adjustment Procedures ..........................................................................3-1

3.1 Field Service Program Modes .......................................................................................................3-13.2 Machine Parameter Adjustment ....................................................................................................3-33.3 Memory Switch Adjustment .........................................................................................................3-623.4 Setting Individual Autodialer Attributes ........................................................................................3-843.5 Unique Switch Adjustment ..........................................................................................................3-883.6 Clear Programmed Data / User Settings ...................................................................................3-1103.7 All RAM Clear ............................................................................................................................3-1103.8 T.30 Monitor ..............................................................................................................................3-1113.9 Printer maintenance mode ........................................................................................................3-1163.10 Monitor speaker .......................................................................................................................3-1173.11 Test Modes ..............................................................................................................................3-1173.12 Print Machine Parameters, Memory Switch and ....................................................................3-122 Unique Switch Settings ...........................................................................................................3-122

3.13 Factory Functions ....................................................................................................................3-1223.14 Line Tests ................................................................................................................................3-1283.15 Mirror Carriage Transfer Mode ................................................................................................3-1313.16 Consumable order sheet .........................................................................................................3-1323.17 DRAM Clear ............................................................................................................................3-1363.18 Clear Life Monitor ....................................................................................................................3-1363.19 Clear Optional Data .................................................................................................................3-1363.20 Set Service Code ....................................................................................................................3-1373.21 Life monitor maintenance ........................................................................................................3-1383.22 Sensor input test .....................................................................................................................3-1403.23 Printer diagnostic mode ...........................................................................................................3-1423.24 Network service mode .............................................................................................................3-1423.25 Flash Rom Sum Check ...........................................................................................................3-143

3.26 Printer registration adjustment ................................................................................................3-1443.27 Set Service Report ..................................................................................................................3-1443.28 Reset Printer Trouble ..............................................................................................................3-1463.29 Cleaning mode ........................................................................................................................3-1463.30 Voice test .................................................................................................................................3-1463.31 Network Switch ........................................................................................................................3-1473.32 Security function maintenance ................................................................................................3-1473.33 Measuring the black ratio ........................................................................................................3-1473.34 Service function menu .............................................................................................................3-1483.35 Quick Initial settings ................................................................................................................3-1483.36 Update the software ................................................................................................................3-150

4 Troubleshooting Procedures ..................................................................4-14.1 Troubleshooting Outline ................................................................................................................4-14.2 Mirror Carriage Error .....................................................................................................................4-14.3 Recording Paper Jam ....................................................................................................................4-2

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


ii

4.4 Document Feeder Jam ..................................................................................................................4-34.5 LCD Failure ...................................................................................................................................4-74.6 Machine malfunction .....................................................................................................................4-84.7 The Image Quality Problems .......................................................................................................4-164.8 Service Call Error ........................................................................................................................4-284.9 Error Codes .................................................................................................................................4-33

5 Maintenance & Adjustment.....................................................................5-15.1 Maintenance schedule ..................................................................................................................5-25.2 Re/Disassemble ............................................................................................................................5-35.3 Adjustment ................................................................................................................................5-136

6 Section 6 Options ...................................................................................6-16.1 Paper cassette ..............................................................................................................................6-16.2 Conformation Stamp .....................................................................................................................6-46.3 Page Counter ................................................................................................................................6-56.4 PCL printer controller ....................................................................................................................6-66.5 OfficeBridge Expansion kit ............................................................................................................6-86.6 Network Interface Board ..............................................................................................................6-106.7 Scanner heater ............................................................................................................................6-12

6.8 Cassette heater ...........................................................................................................................6-14

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


1-1

1 General Description

1.1 Product DescriptionThe MFX-2700 and MFX-2200 are Multi-function products with flat bed scanner and Group 3 andMFX-2700 and MFX-2200 are Multi-function products with flat bed scanner and Group 3 andMulti-function products with flat bed scanner and Group 3 ands with flat bed scanner and Group 3 andwith flat bed scanner and Group 3 andV.34 HDX modem facsimile machine. Documents are printed on plain paper using dry electrophoto-graphic printing.

1.1.1 Parts names and descriptions

1 2 3 4 5 6

16

15

14 12

9

8

10

11

7

13

1 Auto Documet Feeder (ADF) 9 Right cover

2 ADF cover release lever 10 Right cover release lever

3 ADF cover 11 Bypass tray

4 Document guide 12 Lower right covers (paper cassette)

5 Document tray 13 Paper lever indicator

6 Document output area 14 Paper cassette

7 Document output extension tray 15 Front cover

8 Fuser cover 16 Control panel

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


1-2

20

18

17

2219

21

17 Platen cover 20 Paper loading guide

18 Document pad 21 Extention tray

19 Document glass 22 ADF glass

31

30

26

32

25

23

24

28

27

29

23 Paper output area 28 External telephone line jack

24 Ventilation slot 29 Telophone line jack

25 Power switch 30 USB port

26 Power jack 31 10Base-T/100Base-Tx port

27 Handset jack 32 Additional phone line jack

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


1-3

1.2 Specifications

Item Specifications / Comments

Type Desktop type

Telephone network PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network) or equivalent.

Compatibility ITU-T T.4 and T.30

Coding method ITU-T-standard MH, MR, MMR and JBIG

Modem speed 33600, 31200, 28800, 26400, 24000, 21600, 19200, 16800, 14400,12000, 9600, 7200, 4800 and 2400 bps

Dual Access Allows up to three simultaneous operations.

LCD LCD: 15 characters x 5 lines (Touch panel : bottom line only)Language: English and Chinese

Scanning method Black and White

Recording method Dry electrophotographic (LED) printer

Acceptable document size <ADF> Single sheet Two or more sheetsMax: 297 (W) x 432 (L) mm 297 (W) x 420 (L) mmMin: 120 (W) x 100 (L) mm 148 (W) x 105 (L) mmPaper weight: 35 – 128 g/m2 52 – 105 g/m2

Thickness: 0.05 – 0.15 mm 0.07 – 0.12 mm

<FBS glass>Max: 297 (W) x 420 (L) mmMin: No limit

ADF capacity A4 : 50 sheets, B4 : 40 sheets, A3 : 30 sheetsPaper weight: 75.0 g/m2

Scanning resolution <Transmission>horizontal x vertical (in dots/inch x in lines/inch)Normal: 203 x 98Fine: 203 x 196Super fine: 406 x 392* or 600dpi × 600lpiGrayscale: 203 x 196

*: In the case that the remote fax has the ability of “406 x 392”. If not, thesuperfine resolution is “203 x 392“, and the grayscale resolution in feeder

transmission is “203 × 196”.

<Copy>600 x 600 dpi

<Scanner>200 dpi 200 dpi x 200 lpi300 dpi 300 dpi x 300 lpi600 dpi 600 dpi x 600 lpi

Effective Scanning width 294 mm (Fax), 297 mm (Copy)

Transmission speed Under 3 seconds (Super G3)Based on transmission of ITU-T Test Document 1 to a Muratec faxmachine.

Document Memory Standard: 64 MB (4600 pages)

Document memorybackup

(Total memory capacity: Backup time) 64 MB: 72 hoursThe backup battery requires about 24 hours to reach full charge afterpower to the fax unit is restored.

Printing resolution 600 dpi

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


1-4


Printing speed MFX-2700 MFX-2200

Simplex print : 27 ppm 22 ppm

Dupex print : 18 ppm 16 ppm

(When loading A4-sized paper from 1st paper cassette.)

Toner yield Approx. 20,000 sheets20,000 sheets

(Letter, 6 % document coverage under 3-pages interval printing.)6 % document coverage under 3-pages interval printing.)% document coverage under 3-pages interval printing.)Drum yield Approx. 100,000 pages0,000 pages,000 pages

(Letter, 6 % document coverage under 3-pages interval printing.)6 % document coverage under 3-pages interval printing.)% document coverage under 3-pages interval printing.)

Print margin Reading edge, Trailing edge, Left edge and Right edge: 3 mm3 mm

Acceptable recordingpaper

Simplex printing<Paper cassette>A3, A4, A4(LEF), A5, A5(LEF), B4, B5, B5(LEF), F4, 8K, 16K,16K(LEF), Letter, Letter(LEF), Legal, 11x17, Half-letter, Half-letter(LEF),Executive, Executive(LFE)Paper weight: 60 – 90g/m2

<Bypass tray>Plain paper: A3, A4, A4(LEF), A5, A5(LEF), B4, B5, B5(LEF),A3, A4, A4(LEF), A5, A5(LEF), B4, B5, B5(LEF),

Postcard, F4, 8K, 16K, 16K(LEF), Letter, Letter(LEF),

Legal, 11x17, Half-letter, Half-letter(LEF), Executive,Executive(LFE)

Envelopes: DL, COM10, MonarchTransparencyCustom size: (90 – 297 mm) x (140 – 432 mm) (Width x Length)x (140 – 432 mm) (Width x Length)(140 – 432 mm) (Width x Length)x Length)Length)

Duplex printingPlain paper: A3, B4, A4, A4 (LEF), B5, B5(LEF), A5(LEF)(LEF), B5, B5(LEF), A5(LEF)(LEF), B5, B5(LEF), A5(LEF), A5(LEF)

Recording paper capacity <Paper cassette> 500 sheets<Bypass tray> Plain paper: 100 sheet Postcard/Transparency: 30 sheets Envelopes 10 sheets

Receive paper traycapacity

Approx. 250 sheets

Printouts exit Face down

Environmental conditions Ambient temperature: 10°C to 32 °C

Relative humidity: 20 % to 80 % with no condensationPower requirements 220 VAC ± 10 %; 50 Hz0 VAC ± 10 %; 50 HzVAC ± 10 %; 50 Hz

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


1-5


Powerconsumption

Speep mode: 8.5 WLower power mode: 20 WStandby: 57 WhMemory Transmission: 21 WReception: 920 WCopying: 920 WMaximum: 920 W

Dimensions Standard: 597.2 mm (W) x 679.7 mm (D) x 581 mm (H)Maximam: 597.2 mm (W) x 679.7 mm (D) x 953 mm (H)

Weight Approx. 55.4 kg (1st cassette and cartridges excluded)

Optionalproducts

• Second, third and fourth paper cassette• PCL printer controller• Mechanical page counter• Network interface board• OfficeBridge board• Conformation stamp• Condensation countermeasure kit (for the paper supply unit)• Condensation countermeasure kit (for the scanner unit)• Cabinet

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


2 Machine Composition

2

3

4

1

35

5 6 7 8 9

10

12

131415

17

181920

2223

25

26

30

313233

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

34

272829

24

21

16

11

1 Feed roller 22 Transfer roller

2 DS2 23 Magnet roller

3 Press roller 24 Regist roller

4 DRS 25 Regist shaft

5 Exit roller 26 Pickup MP roller

6 Separator roller 27 Separator roller

7 DW2 28 Ritard roller8 DW1 29 Pickup roller

9 DL1 30 Feed roller

10 Lens 31 Agitator paddle

11 CCD 32 Agitator screw A

12 Exit roller A 33 Agitator screw B

13 Exit roller B 34 Toner screw B

14 Cleaning roller 35 Toner agitator paddle

15 Heat roller 36 Toner screw A

16 Lamp Heater 37 Ozone filter

17 Press fuser roller 38 Fan

18 Cleaner blade 39 Mirror C

19 Charge unit 40 Mirror A20 OPC drum 41 Mirror B

21 LED head 42 Lamp

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


2.1 Document Scanning Sequence

2.1.1 ADF DetectionWhen a document is placed into the document feeder, Document Sensor 1 (DS1) is activated and youwill hear the short beep. The width of document is detected by DW1and DW2 and length of documentis detected by DL1sensor.

The document will be transferred when the start key is pressed. The motor drives clutch 1 (CL1) withthe gear for the pick up roller to turn.

Document separation is the process that allows a multi-page document to go through the scanner onepage at a time. The bottom document is separated from the remaining documents by the friction of theseparator pad.

Following the document separation, the separate roller causes the document to advance. During thisfeed, clutch 2 (CL2) is set to off not to supply power of the motor to the feed roller. A loop is madeby the transfer roller, which prevents the document to skew. As it advances, the leading edge ofthe document activates the DS2 sensor. Once DS2 is activated, the feed roller continues to rotateuntil the document reaches the scan position. The machine uses the distance from DS2 to the scanposition and the diameter of the feed roller to determine the number of rotations necessary to feed the

document to the scan position.

When the document reaches the scan position, the light from the scanner lamp strikes the face of thedocument and is reflected into the lens through mirrors A, B, and C. In case the light intensity alongthe length of the scanner lamp is not uniform, shading compensation is provided to ensure evenillumination.

As the reflected image passes through the lens, it is focused onto the charged coupled device (CCD).

The CCD then converts the dark and light areas of the image into electrical impulses, or image data.

When DS2 detects the trailing edge of the document, the image signal output is turned off. Thescanner continues to remain active for a few more seconds in case there is another document tofollow.

The scanned document is discharged through the document exit by the exit roller.

Document detection (ADF)The sizes of the documents are detected by the following two sensors;

Detection Action Sensor

Document presence Detects whether there is a documenton the tray or not

DS1

Leading and trailing edgedetection

Detects the leading and trailing edge ofthe feeding document

DS2, DRS

Document size detection

• length Detects the length of the document onthe tray

DL1

• width Detects the width of the document on thetray

DW1, DW2

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


2.1.2 FBS sectionThe FBS (Flat Bet Scanner) section consists of document glass (pain), the optical reading section(Carriage A Assy, Carriage B Assy and scanner frame Assy) and scanner driving section.

The document size detection stars when the BIS sensor is on. The detection of whether the FBScover is closed is made by the APS sensor.

Light reflected from the original passes through three mirrors and a lens to form a reduced image onthe CCD Sensor as the Scanner Motor moves the Scanner. The CCD sensor converts the light pattern(image data) into an electrical image signal.

The electrical image signal is then output to the Main Board.

Exposure Section: Construction and Function

1

1

2

3

1 Refector TapeThe Reflector Tape reflects the light from the Exposure Lamp and supplements its illumination.

2 Exposure LampA Cold Cathode Fluorescent Lamp (CCFL) is used to illuminate the original.

3 Mirror

Directs the reflected light from the original to the lens.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


Scanner frame Moving Mechanism

<Carriage A>

• During a scan, the Carriage A projects an even amount of light from the Exposure Lamp onto theentire surface of the original. The light is reflected from the original to the Mirror A of the Carriage Aand then to the Mirror B and Mirror C of the Carriage B.

• The Carriage A is driven by the FBS Motor and front and rear Scanner Drive belts.

• Scanner speed is determined by the set zoom ratio in reference to the full size mode.

• The Carriage A is at home position when Scanner Home Position Sensor is blocked. This positionserves as the reference for the scan motion.

<Carriage B>

• The Mirror B and Mirror C are mounted to their holder at right angles to each other. They direct thelight reflected off the Mirror A through the lens to the CCD.

• The Carriage B is also moved by the Scanner Drive belts and pulleys driven by the FBS Motor.It travels at a speed half that of the Carriage A, thereby keeping constant the optical path lengthbetween the Original Glass and lens.

10

11

12

9

4

3

1

2

5

6

8

7

13

1 APS sensor 8 PCB CCD

2 BIS sensor 9 Caridge A

3 Caridge B 10 Lamp

4 Document size detection sensor 11 Mirror A

5 FBS motor 12 Home sensor

6 Inverter 13 Mirror B and C7 Lens

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


Document size detection (FBS)

When the machine is in Auto Paper or Auto Size, the document length detecting sensor mounted inthe FBS section receive light reflected off the original to allow the machine to determine the documentlength size.

And the CCD detects document width by reflecting light from the Exposure Lamp.

Document size Multi Beam Sensor(Length detection)

CCD(Width detection)

A4 A4

A5

A5

B4

B5

B5

A3

: Means that the unit is used.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


2.2 Recording Section

Recording Paper Feed Path

A sheet of the recording paper is separated from the remaining paper by the friction of the pickuproller.

The paper is moved along the paper guide until it reaches the register roller, then fed by the rotationof the register roller.

In duplex printing, the machine can print both sides of the paper (duplex printing).When the first side of the paper is printed, it is transferred to the exit. However after a few steps afterSwitchback (SWBK) sensor detected the trailing edge, the exit roller rolls in reverse and the paper istransferred to the image processing area by the duplex rollers.

It reaches to the image transfer area turned inside out, and the duplex side of the paper is printed.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


2.3 Image ProcessingThe fax incoming data, copy data or pirnt data is sent to the printer for image processing.

1. OPC Drum

2. Drum Charging

3. LED Exposure

4. Development

5. Paper Feed

6. Manual Bypass

7. Image Transfer

8. Discharge Plage

9. Cleaning

10. Erase

11. Fusing12. Paper Exit

The image processing is roughly divided into the following steps:

1. OPC Drum

Changes the image of the original projected onto the surface of the OPC drum to a correspondingelectrostatic latent image.

2. Drum Charge

Generates a negative DC charged layer on the surface of the OPC Drum.

3. Drum Exposure

The LED light strikes the surface of the OPC Drum, creating an electrostatic latent image.

4. Development

Negatively charged toner adheres to the latent image on the OPC Drum surface. DC negative biasvoltages are applied to the Sleeve/Magnet rollers, thereby preventing toner from sticking to thebackground.

5. Paper Feed

Feeds sheets of paper from the appropriate paper source.

6. Bypass Paper Feed

Feeds sheets of paper from the bypass source.

7. Image Transfer

A positive charge is applied to the Transfer roller to transfer the visible image on the surface of the

OPC Drum onto the paper.

8. Discharge Plate

The discharge plate removes the potential charge from paper.

9. Cleaning

Residual toner is scraped off the surface of the OPC Drum.

10. Erase

The OPC Drum is exposed to light, which effectively neutralize any residual charge on the surfaceof the OPC Drum.

11. Fusing

Heat and pressure fuse toner on the paper .12. Paper Exit

Feeds paper out of the MFP onto the exit tray.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


2.3.1 LED exposureLocation of the unit

The LED exposure area depends on the paper size. The image lacks each edge of the paper for 3mmbecause of non-exposure area.

3mm 3mm

3mm

3mm

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


2.3.2 Drum CartridgeLocation of the unit

The drum cartridge consists of charge section / drum / developing section / cleaning section.

1 2 3 4 5

6

7

8

910

1 Eraser 6 OPC Drum

2 Charge unit 7 Magnet roller

3 Waste toner screw 8 Agitator paddle

4 Cleaner blade 9 Agitator screw A

5 Waste toner paddle 10 Agitator screw B

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


2.3.3 Drum charge• The OPC Drum Charge Corona has a grid mesh to deposit a charge evenly across the surface of the

OPC Drum.

• The corona unit has a comb electrode that discharges only toward the grid mesh, thus minimizingthe amount of ozone produced.

2.3.4 DevelopmentThe toner supplied from the toner cartridge is stirred by the agitator and paddle, and is transferred tothe developing roller.

The developing roller consists of a magnet roller and a sleeve roller turning around it. The developingroller transfers the toner to the OPC drum.

The toner on the drum surface is controlled by the developing bias on the developing roller.

ATDC sensor

The ATDC sensor is at the bottom of the toner cartridge. The toner density (T/D) in the developing unitis detected by a magnetic permeability sensor. When the toner density becomes low, the RX motorrotates the screw in the toner hopper and supplies the toner to the developing unit. The sensor isadjusted when the drum cartridge is replaced.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


2.3.5 Cleaning the OPC drumThe cleaner blade is pressed against the OPC drum surface to scrape toner off the surface.

The eraser lamp lights the drum surface to neutralize the potential of the OPC drum after the imagetransfer.

1 2

3

1 Eraser 3 OPC Drum2 Charge unit

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


2.3.6 Toner CartridgeLocation of the unit

Toner cartridge structure

The toner in the toner cartridge is transferred to the screw by the toner agitator paddle sheet which ison the toner agitator paddle. The paddle rotates by TP motor. The toner screw A is also rotating andtransfers the toner to the discharger.

1 23

4

1 Toner agitator paddle 3 Toner screw A

2 Toner agitator paddle sheet 4 Discharger

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


Toner hopper structure

A piezoelectric vibrating sensor detects the remaining toner. The toner is stirred by the agitator. Thetoner in the hopper is transferred to the drum cartridge by the rotating screw.

1 2

3

1 Toner sensor 3 Screw

2 Agitator

Waste Toner collection

The toner pressed against the OPC drum is scratched by the cleaning blade, and transferred to thewaste toner collection area located at the bottom of the toner cartridge by the waste toner collectionscrew. The toner in the collection area is design to accumulate evenly by the toner screw B.

1

2

1 Opening 2 Toner screw B

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


Toner transferring mechanism

13

2

4

5

1 Toner cartridge 4 Drum cartridge

2 Toner hopper 5 Toner collection route

3 Toner supply route

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


2.3.7 Image TransferLocation of the unit

Structure

A charge is applied to the Transfer roller to transfer the toner image formed on the surface of the OPCdrum onto the paper.

The image transfer current is controlled according to the size and type of paper ,whether the copy

cycle is 1-sided or 2-sided, temperature and humidity .The surface of theTransfer Roller is cleaned by applying the same negative polarity as the toner.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


Discharger Brush

To neutralize any charge potential left in the paper which has undergone the image transfer stage,there is the Discharge Brush fitted to the guide plate after the Transfer Roller.

Drum Scrapers

The drum scrapers mounted in the drum cartridge properly separate paper from the surface of theOPC drum.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


2.3.8 FusingLocation of the unit

The toner image transferred on to the paper is securely fixed.

A heat roller system is used as the fusing system. The heat roller is heated by the lamp heater insidethe roller. The toner image is securely fixed by the pressure between the heat roller and press fuserroller.

A thermistor detects and controls the heater roller’s temperature.

1 32 4

9 678 5

1 Cleaning roller 6 Paper

2 Heat roller 7 Non-fused toner3 Paper separate blade 8 Lamp heater

4 Fused toner 9 Thermistor

5 Press fuser roller

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


The cleaning roller cleans the dirt of the heat roller. It is driven by the heat roller and rotates at acircumferential velocity of 0.625 times faster than the heat roller.

1

2 3 4 5

1 Press roller 4 Thermistor

2 Heat roller 5 Thermal fuse

3 Thermostat

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


2.3.9 Paper supplyThe main motor drives the pickup roller and the paper feed roller to supply paper.

The pickup roller transfers the paper and the paper feed roller and separate roller separates one sheetof paper and fed into the main unit.

When the paper cassette is closed, the lever is pushed to lower the pickup roller.

The Liftup upper limit sensor detects the upper limit position when the paper lifting plate is raised.

The paper empty sensor detects when paper in the cassette runs out.

1

5

4

2

3

6

1 Lever 4 Paper feed roller

2 Pickup roller 5 Separate roller

3 Liftup upper limit sensor 6 Paper empty sensor

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


2.4 Interconnect Block Diagram

M o s c o w

C a b l e D i a g r a m

P R I N T E

R

U N I T

P C B M A I N

2 n d C A S S E T T E

4 t h C A S S E T T E

F u s e s r

P 2 3

P C B C A S S E T T E


+ 2 4 V : ( 1 , 3 )

T H E R M I S T E R ( A 3 )

H i b r i d c o n n e c t o r

H i b r i d c o n n e c t o r 1 A

+ 5 V : ( 5 )

5

+ 3 . 3 V : ( 7 )

G N

D : ( 2 1 , 2 3 , 2 5 , 2 7 , 2 9 )

( A 3

)

( A 3 )

1 4

1 4

1 4

1 4

T h e r m a l c u t o f f

+ 3 . 3 V : 2

G N D : 4

T h e r m a l c u t o f f

F B S U N I T

P C B N C U

D A A

P x x

P C B S C A N N E R

L A M P I N V E R T E

R

+ 4 V : ( 2 4 , 2 5 )

L A M P

2

2

2 4 V : ( 3 )

3

P 1 4 7

+ 5 V : ( 1 4 , 1 5 )

G N D : ( 1 )

+ 3 . 3 V : ( 1 0 , 1 1 )

G N D : ( 1 2 , 1 3 , 1 6 , 1 7 , 2 6 , 2 7 )

G N D : ( 1 , 9

, 1 7 , 2 5 , 3 3 , 4 1 , 4 9 , 5 0 )

P 1 4 B

A D F U N I T

+ 2 4 V : ( 1 )

P C B A D F

A D F M O T O R ( B i H B )

H E A T E R L A M P ( A 3 )

G N D : ( 2 )

3

4

+ 2 4 V : ( 2 , 5 )

6

P 1 4 8 1

P 1 4 8 0

+ 2 4 V : ( 4 , 5 , 6 )

+ 5 V : ( 3 1 , 3 3 )

L P S

P C B C C D

+ 3 . 3 V : ( 2 7 )

C N 2

P 1 4 1

P 1 8 0

G N D : ( 1 , 2 , 3 , 7 , 8 )

D C L C S E

+ 2 4 V : ( 3 , 4 , 5 , 6 )

+ 1 2 V : ( 1 9 , 2 0 )

+ 2 4 V : ( 1 )

2

2

P 1 4 8 2

+ 5 V : ( 1 1 , 1 2 )

+ 5 V : ( 1 , 2 )

+ 3 . 3 V : ( 1 3 , 1 4 )

G N D : ( 4 , 6 , 8 , 1 0

, 1 2 , 1 3 , 1 4 , 1 6 , 1 8 )

G N D : ( 7 , 8 , 9 , 1 0 , 1 5 , 1 6 )

+ 3 . 3 V : ( 5 9 , 6 1 ,

1 0 , 1 3

, 2 2 , 3 0 , 4 0 , 4 1 , 4 2 , 4 3 )

P 1 4 2 0

D C L C R E

G

N D : ( 1 , 1 2 , 1 4 , 2 3 , 3 1 ,

6

P 1 4 2

+ 2 4 V : ( 3 )

2

2

3 3

, 3 4 , 3 6 , 3 7 , 5 8 , 6 0 , 7 2 )

+ 2 4 V : ( 2 , 5 )

P 1 4 2 1

P C B C O N N M

O T

H O M E S E N S O R

T X I L

P 2 0

+ 5 V : ( 7 )

3

G N D : ( 2 )

G N D : ( 6 )

P 1 9

A P S

D W 1 ( D B 4 )

P 1 4 4

+ 5 V : ( 3 )

3

P 1 4 8 3

G N D : ( 2 )

G N D : ( 2 )

B I S

D W 2 ( D A 3 )

+ 5 V : ( 6 )

3

P C B L P H

G N D : ( 5 )

G N D : ( 5 )

P 1 3

P 6

+ 3 . 3 V : ( 1 1 ,

1 3 , 1 4 )

D L 1 ( D A D F A 3 )

G N D : ( 1 8 , 1

9 , 2 0 )

+ 5 V : ( 7 )

3

P 2 1

S B S

G N D : ( 9 )

L E D H E A D

+ 3 V : ( 1 )

4 0 F F C

P 4

G N D : ( 6 )

G N D : ( 3 , 6 )

D L 2 ( D A D F R E G )

+ 5 V : ( 1 0 )

3

4 0 F F C

P 5

M B S

G N D : ( 1 2 )

P 1 4 5

3

S T A M P E R

+ 2 4 V : ( 1 )

2

P 1 4 8 4

P C B P C L

P 1 4 9

+ 5 V : ( 3 7 , 3 8 , 4 1 )

2 4 V : ( 1 )

+ 3 . 3 V : ( 2 1 , 2 2 , 2 5 )

G N D : ( 4 , 8 , 1 2 , 1 6 , 2 0 , 2 8 , 3 6 , 4 4 , 4 8 )

D S 2

+ 5 V : ( 3 )

3

P 1 4 8 6

P C B L I M E

P 2

G N D : ( 2 )

+ 5 V : ( 3 7 , 3 8 , 4 1 )

+ 3 . 3 V : ( 2 1 , 2 2 , 2 5 )

G N D : ( 4 , 8 , 1 2 , 1 6 , 2 0 , 2 8 , 3 6 , 4 4 , 4 8 )

D R S

+ 5 V : ( 6 )

3

G N D : ( 5 )

F L A S H W R I T E R J I G

P C B D P R A M I / F

5 V : ( 1 , 2 )

G N D : ( 1 6 )

D S 1

+ 5 V : ( 3 )

3

P 1 4 8 7

P C B N C U

D A A

P C B E X T L I N E 2

6 8

G N D : ( 2 )

L I N E

P 8

+ 2 4 V : ( 6 6 )

6 2

P x x

+ 5 V : ( 4 3 )

T E L

+ 3 . 3 V : ( 6 7 , 6 8 )

G N D : ( 3 , 7 , 1 1 , 1 5 , 1 9 , 2 3 , 3 1

E X T E L

3 5 , 4 7 , 5 1 , 5 5 , 5 9 , 6 3 )

P C B P A N E L B

P 1 1

+ 5 V : ( 3 , 4 , 5 )

+ 3 . 3 V : ( 1 , 2 )

G N D : ( 2 9 , 3

0 , 3 1 , 3 2 )

L C D

+ 3 . 3 V : ( 1 5 , 1 6 )

+ 5 V : ( 1 )

G N D : ( 1 7 , 1 8 )

P C B V O I C E

+ 3 . 3 V : ( 1 )

G N D : ( 1 4 , 1 5 )

( A 3 )

1 B

P C B P A N E L A

P 3

P C B C O N N

P C L

2

C N 1

1 2

P 1 2

2 8

P 9

+ 5 V : ( 4 0 , 4 5 , 4 6 )

2 6

P 1 4 0 A

1 6

P 2 2

3 2 1

6

P 1 8

P 7

P 6

+ 5 V : ( 1 5 , 1 6

, 1 7 )

2 8

P 1

E X T M E M O R Y

2

P 1 4 0 B

+ 1 2 V : ( 4 3 , 4 4 )

+ 3 . 3 V ( 4 2 , 4 7 , 4 8 )

P 1 4 A

1 5

P 1 4 8

P 1 4 3

3 3

5 V : ( 6 )

3

5 V : ( 6 )

P 1 4 6

3

5 V : ( 1 , 4 )

2

H E A T E R

5 V : ( 3 )

F B S M O T O R

( B i H B )

2 0 F C C

1 5

1 5

1 5

T H E R M I S

T E R

( A 3 )

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


P C B P R T

P C B M A I N

P 1 5 A

+ 5 V : ( 3 3 , 3 4 )

P R T M O T O R - 1 [ R X M O T O R ] ( D C )

2 4 V : ( 2 )

6

P 1 5 9

+ 3 . 3 V : ( 2 6 , 3 1 , 3 2 )

G N D : ( 1 , 3 6 , 3 7 , 3 8 , 3 9 , 4 0 , 9 , 1 7 )

G N D : ( 1 )

P 1 5 B

+ 2 4 V : ( 1 , 3 , 1 5 , 1 7 , 1 9 )

G N D : ( 5 , 7 , 9 , 1 1 , 1 3 , 1 8 , 2 0 )

P R T M O T O R - 2 [ R X M O T O R ] ( D C )

G N D : ( 1 )

P a p e r e m p t y s e n s o r ( 1 s t C A S )

1 5 3 P

6

3

+ 5 V : ( 3 )

G N D : ( 2 )

S a f e t y i n t e r l o c k s w i t c h

/ P E S

+ 2 4 V : ( 1 , 2 )

2

2

P 1 5 2

L i f t u p ( 1 s t ) ( A 3 )

+ 5 V : ( 6 )

P 1 8 9

G N D : ( 5 )

P C B D U P L E X

6

0 1

P 1 7 5

+ 2 4 V : ( 5 , 7 )

P a p e r s i z e s e u s e r / C a s s e t t e o p e n s e n s o r ( 1 s t ) ( A 3 )

G N D : ( 1 0 )

5

P 1 5 4

G N D : ( 9 )

D U P c l u t c h ( A 3 )

C A S O P , P S I Z E ( 4 b i t T y p e )

P 1 7 8

2

P a p e r s u p l y s e n s o r ( A 3 ) + 5 V : ( 3 )

3

P 1 5 5

T h e r m i s t o r ( A 3 )

G N D : ( 2 )

P S S

G N D : ( 3 )

D r u m c a r t r i d g e ( A 3 )

[ e ]

T r a n s f e r R o l l e r

A T D C s e n s o r ( A 3 )

H i b r i d c o n n e c t o r 2 B

P S U H V ( A 3 )

4

P 1 7 3

G N D : ( 9 )

+ 2 4 V : ( 5 , 1 5 )

+ 3 V : ( 9 )

E X I T r o l l e r

c h a s s i s

D R U M U N I T ( A 3 )

G N D : ( 7 , 1 4 )

( A 3 )

( A 3 )

P C B D E V

P C B E R S

T o n e r c a r t r i d g e s e n s o r O N ( A 3 )

D F G - S 3 S 3 B - 5 0 9

F U S E

1 0

3

P 1 7 2

G N D : ( 2 )

D F G - S 3 S 3 B - 5 0 8

T O N E R E M P T Y ( A 3 )

P 1 8 5

P 1 5 6

2

2

+ 2 4 V : ( 1 )

G N D : ( 6 )

D F G - S 3 S 3 B - 5 3 0

F C L_ 1

S C R E W c

l u t c h ( A 3 )

p a p e r

r e s i s t c l u t c h ( A 3 )

D u p l e x f e e d r o l l e r

+ 2 4 V : ( 1 )

2

2

P 1 7 7

c h a s s i s

+ 2 4 V : ( 3 )

P 1 5 7

D F G - S 3 S 3 B - 5 2 0

t o n o e r M O T O R ( A 3 )

l i f t - u p M O T O R ( 1 s t )

P 1 7 6

+ 2 4 V : ( 5 )

2

P 1 9 0

p a p e r

f e e d s o l e n o i d ( A 3 )

P 1 5 8

2

2

+ 2 4 V : ( 1 )

F C L C

H H

( n o n p o l e )

P D S

P a p e r e m p t y s e n s o r ( B Y P A S S )

P 1 6 5

+ 5 V : ( 5 )

3

P 1 6 0

G N D : ( 2 )

G N D : ( 4 )

/ B P_

P E S

D U P s w i t c h b a c k s e n s o r ( A 3 )

P C B B P S I Z E

P 1 8 1

G N D : ( 1 0 )

5

P 1 6 9

G N D : ( 5 )

J a m a c c e s s c o v e r s e n s o r ( 1 s t )

D U P J A M S E N S O R ( A 3 )

P 1 8 4

3

+ 5 V : ( 1 3 )

G N D : ( 8 )

G N D : ( 1 2 )

/ J C O P

S P E A K E R

c o u n t e r ( A 3 )

P 1 5 1

2

+ 2 4 V : ( 1 )

1 1

2 2

F A N ( 8 0 m m )

G N D : ( 5 )

1 1

3

P 1 6 1

3 3


P 1

P 2

P a p e r s i z e S E N S O R

P 5

5

J a m a c c e s s c o v e r s e n s o r ( 2 , 3 , 4 )

C A S O P , P S I Z ( 4 b i t T y p e )

P 4

1 2

3

C A S M O T O R

P 6

6

J a m s e n s o r

3

P 3

F C L_

2 , 3 , 4

2

2

3

L i f t M O T O R

P a p e r e u p t y s e n s o r ( 2 , 3 C A S )

2

3

P E S

1

H V u n i t

3

2

L i f t u p s e n s o r

2

p a p e r

f e e d c l u t c h ( B 4 )

H i b r i d c o n n e c t o r 2 A

2 0

P 1 5 0 B

4 0

P 1 5 0 A

2

P 1 7 9

P 1 6 6

P 1 8 6

3

+ 5 V : ( 3 )

P 1 7 1

1 1

+ 2 4 V : ( 1 1 )

P 1 8 8

4

+ 5 V : ( 1 )

P 1 8 7

6

2 4 V : ( 2 )

3

+ 5 V : ( 4 )

2

+ 2 4 V : ( 4 )

3

+ 5 V : ( 3 )

3

+ 5 V : ( 6 )

3

+ 5 V : ( 9 )

B y p a s s t r a y f l a p p e r

D i s c h a r g e r b r u s h

c h a s s i s

c h a s s i s

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


2.5 Block diagrams

ADFMOTOR

FBSMOTOR

IC1

Driver.

Lamp

IC2

CCD 600dpi

PCB CCDPCB SCANER

IC5 AFE

PCB ADF

IC2 MD0008

IMAGE

PROCESSINGIC6 MD0002

Image

Memory

Control

IC13

256Mb-SDRAM(Image Memory)

Option

PCL

OP-550

IC35

MMD5020

MODEM V34 R J 1 1

PCB MAIN

Option

Office Bridge Pro

WS-550

Option

NIC

NP-400 R J 4 5

R J 4 5

Option

2ndLINE

MODEM

Option

2ndLINE

NCU R J 1 1

IC2 MD0010 SYSTEM ASIC

CODEC

(COMM)

RES. CONV

(COMM)

RES. CONV

(Smoothing)

CODEC

(Scanner)

CODEC

(Printer)

VIDEO I/FLED I/F

I m a g e B u s C o n t r o l l e r

S

y s t e m

B u s C o n t r o l l e r

USB 1.1 I/F

IC7 64Mb

FLASH ROM

IC8 (*2)

1Mb-SRAM

IC1 SH7706

CPU

EX memory (*1)

256Mb-SDRAM

LCD

PANEL-A

PANEL-B

PRINTER

UNIT

PCB LPH

IC1

LPH control

LED HEAD

G a t e

G a t e

G a t e

PCB PANEL

G a t e

G a t e

POWER

SUPPLY

or

PCB NCU DAA

PSU-200E

CompactFlash Memory

PCBVOICE

Lithium battery

IC2

MSM6650

IC5 32Mb

FLASH ROM

Ni-MH battery

AudioSPEAKER

S y s

t e m

B u s - B

Inverter

PCB PRT

S y s t e m

B u s

IC9 (*1)

256Mb-SDRAM

(System Memory)

(Document Memory)(ECM Buffer)

(MODEM Buffer)

CON

Power

Saved

Main

MOTOR1Option

MainMOTOR2

IC1

Driver.

PCB CASSETTEHIGH VOLTAGEPOWER SUPPLY(*2) Cpmmected to the Lithium battery

(*1) Cpmmected to the Ni-MH battery

Main Control PCB

The main control PCB controls the operations of all machine functions.

The modem modulates and demodulates the data, detects the control signal, and send DTMF signals.

It processes the rotation of the scanned image, fax received image and print image.

It transports the image in memory to the LPH PCB in serial data.

When a Compact Flash Memory Card is inserted to the socket and the machine is turned on, ittransfers the updating data to the SDRAM, and after the transferring writes the data on to the FLASHmemory.

It controls the High Voltage Power Supply.

Memory section:

FLASH MEMORY --- The FLASH MEMORY contains all program instructions for unit operation,the background level and all other parameters.

SRAM --- The SRAM, which is backed-up by a lithium battery is used to store user programmedinformation. When the jumper pin JP2 is removed, the stored information will be cleared.

SDRAM --- The SDRAM is used for buffer the following items. It is backed-up by a Nickel-metal-hydride battery on the Voice PCB.

•Program data - When the machine is turned on, the CPU operation data on the Flashmemory will be copied to SDRAM, and the program will be executed.

•Program data - Encoded image data

•Program data - Temporary memory for transmission

NOTE: The SDRAM back-up battery is connected to the Voice PCB. When the Main control PCBis replaced, the connection will be lost. To remove the Main control PCB without loosing thebacked-up memory, do not remove the harness between Main control PCB and Voice PCB.

NOTE: When the jumper pin JP2 is removed and reinserted, be sure to clear all the data.

NOTE: When the harness between the Main control PCB and Voice PCB is removed and reinserted,execute the DRAM Clear operation. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <6> and [Yes].)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


Scanner PCB

The scanner PCB detect the sensors on the scanner.

It controls the drive motor.

It drives the FBS motor.

It controls the CCD.

It offsets and adjust the image signal (analog) from the CCD, converts AD, and processes the image.

ADF PCB

The ADF PCB detect the sensors on the ADF.

It controls the ADF drive motor.

CCD PCB

The CCD PCB scans the document with 600 dpi CCD, and transfer the image signal (analog) to theScanner PCB.

PRT PCB

The PRT PCB detect the sensors in the printer unit.

It controls the clutch.

LPH PCB

The LPH PCB changes the print serial data on the Main control PCB to a data format for LED-PrintHead, and transfer the data to the LED-Print-Head.

It reads the LED individual difference correction data, and adjust the print density automatically.

Panel PCB

The Panel PCB controls the LCD.

It scans the keys on the panel and on the LCD.

Voice PCB

The Voice PCB outputs the voice guidance.

The nickel metal hydride battery to back-up the SDRAM of the Main control PCB, is equipped on thevoice PCB.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


2.6 Network Control Unit (NCU) PCB

The NCU PCB provides the connection to the telephone line. It consists of the interface circuit, ringsignal detector and telephone control circuit.

L I N E

T E L 1

T E L 2

IC1

PC4

IC2

SDO

CI

SDI

OFHK

FSYNL

MCLK24.576MHZ

OH

NCU PCB block diagram

Major components of the NCU

IC1: AFE (Analog Front End)IC1 has the following functions:

• Off Hook (The establishment of DC loop state): It makes the quiescent state from the loop state.

• CI detector: It detects the ringing signal.

• OH detector: It detects the state of On-hook or Off-hook of the external telephone.

IC2

IC2 controls the IC1. It also sets the parameter of the IC1.

H relay

It exchanges the connection for the Tel1 and Tel2 line connection.

Normally, it is connected to the line, makes AC loop and detects Off-hook by line current.

When it is connected to the private line, the line current is not available but it is supplied privatecurrent from the MFP.

CI detector

Detects the calling signal.

OH detector

Detects the hook condition of the second telephone unit. Normally, IC1 detects the hook condition.When the second telephone is connected to the private line, PC4 detects the hook condition.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


2.7 Low Voltage Power Supply Unit (LVPS)

The power supple is from 220 VAC to 240 VAC.

The power supply unit receives the input line voltage and currents it to output voltage of +5 VDC, +24VDC and +3.3 VDC.

+24 VDC is controlled by transformer, + 5 VDC and + 3.3 VDC is controlled by DC/DC converter.

It consists of the primary controller, secondary controller, heater controller and flicker controller.

The AC input is switched between INLET and AC SW.

An overvoltage and overcurrent preventing circuit is equipped.

A driver circuit for the heat roller is quipped.

The output range is from 750 W / 220 VAC to 750 W / 240 VCA.

L

N

HEATER

CONTROL 2

LINE FILTERRECTIFICATION/

LEVEL

CONTROL IC

RECTIFICATION/

LEVEL

CONTROL

DC/DC +

+3.3V

HC1

DB2 LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY

FUSE

CONTROL

+24V

01

OUTPUT HEATER CN101

PC1A

PC2A

PT102

SW

CONTROL

DC/DC +

HEATER

CONTROL 1

CN1

HC2

3

4

5

6

13

14

11

12

2

1

7

8

9

10

15

16

PT101

INLET INPUT AC CN1

+5.0V

+24.0V

PGND

SGND

OUTPUT CN2

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


2.8 High Voltage Power Supply

This PCB makes and supply high voltage for every electrophotographic process (charging, grid,developing, transferring).

To charge the drum surface negatively, the charge section generates negative-voltage and impressesthe comb electrode.

To charge the drum surface evenly, the grid mesh at the opening of the charge section generates

negative-voltage and impresses the grid electrode. The voltage is changed by an analog signal.

To transfer the toner in the developing unit to the drum, the developing unit generates negative-chargeand impresses the mag-roller. The voltage is changed by an analog signal.

To transfer the image on the drum to the paper, the transfer unit generates positive-voltage andimpresses the transfer roller. By cleaning the transfer roller, negative-voltage is generated andimpressed to the roller. The voltage is changed by an analog signal.

PCB

HVPS

Charge(-)

Grid(-)

Developer(-)

+24V

Control Signal

Analog Signal

Transfer (+)Transfer (-)

DB2 PCB High Voltage Power Supply

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-1

3 Adjustment Procedures

3.1 Field Service Program ModesThe fax machine feature maintenance modes for machine adjustment. Each mode is listed belowalong with the command used to activate the mode and a brief functional description.

Note: When you press “ * ”, you will hear short beeps. However continue the operation, as there is nothere is nois no

problem.

Set or Clear Machine Parameters ..............................................................................SETTING, *, 0, 0

Used to set or clear machine parameters.

Set or Clear Memory Switches ...................................................................................SETTING, *, 0, 1

Used to set or clear memory switches.

Clear Programmed Data / User Settings ...................................................................SETTING, *, 0, 22

Erases user-programmed information (date, time, TTI, address book, etc.) and any docu-address book, etc.) and any docu-, etc.) and any docu-ments stored in memory.

All RAM Clear ...............................................................................................................SETTING, *, 0, 3

Erases same information as “Clear Programmed Data / User Settings” function along withresetting all of the machine memory switches and unique switches to factory defaults.

Set or Clear Unique Switches.....................................................................................SETTING, *, 0, 4

Used to set or clear Unique switches.

T.30 Monitor .................................................................................................................SETTING, *, 0, 5

Used to print a G3 procedural summary of the fax communication.

Printer maintenance ....................................................................................................SETTING, *, 0, 6

Access this mode to determine the cause of the “ Call Service” error message.ccess this mode to determine the cause of the “ Call Service” error message.“ Call Service” error message.“ Call Service” error message.

Or, when replaced the Fuser unit or Image transfer roller, reset the counter using this mode.hen replaced the Fuser unit or Image transfer roller, reset the counter using this mode.Image transfer roller, reset the counter using this mode.ransfer roller, reset the counter using this mode., reset the counter using this mode.

Monitor Speaker ..........................................................................................................SETTING, *, 0, 8

Use to hear the signal sound with machine’s speaker during fax transaction.

Test Modes ...................................................................................................................SETTING, *, 0, 9

Allows the technician to perform a series of diagnostic tests.

Print Machine Parameters, Memory Switches and

Unique Switches List ..................................................................................................SETTING, *, 1, 0

Prints a list of the machine switch settings showing the default settings and current settings.

Factory Functions ......................................................................................................SETTING, *, 1, 11


Line Testss .....................................................................................................................SETTING, *, 1, 22


Mirror Carriage Transfer Mode ...................................................................................SETTING, *, 1, 4

Perform it before installing the fax machine.

Set or clear the consumable order sheet ..................................................................SETTING, *, 1, 5

Used to set or clear the consumable order sheet.

DRAM Clear ..................................................................................................................SETTING, *, 1, 6

Used to clear a DRAM.

Clear Life Monitor ........................................................................................................SETTING, *, 1, 7

Used to clear a Life monitor keeps a count of the pages scanned, etc.

Clear option module’s SRAM ...................................................................................... SETTING *, 1. 8

Used to clear a SRAM of option module.

Set Service Code .........................................................................................................SETTING, *, 1, 9

Used to protect to clear a Life monitor.

Life Monitor Maintenance ...........................................................................................SETTING, *, 2, 0When the main PCB has been replaced, you should register the previous several countervalues of the life monitor.

Sensor Input test ........................................................................................................SETTING, *, 2, 2

Sensor diagnostic test.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-2

Printer diagnostic mode .............................................................................................SETTING, *, 2, 3Printer diagnostic test.

Network service modemodemodeode ...............................................................................................SETTING, *, 2, 4Used to display the server sumcheck, export/import the network setting data or to initializeserver sumcheck, export/import the network setting data or to initializethe network settings.

Flash ROM Sum check ................................................................................................SETTING, *, 2, 9Used to confirm flash ROM Check Sum after the software is overwritten.

Service Report setting ................................................................................................SETTING, *, 4, 24, 2

Used to enter location where to send the service report.

Printer registration adjustmentregistration adjustmentadjustment ..................................................................................SETTING, *, 4, 34, 3

Used to adjust the printer registration.adjust the printer registration.registration.

Printer trouble reset ....................................................................................................SETTING, *, 4, 54, 5

Used to delete the error message on the LCD.delete the error message on the LCD.

Cleaning mode .............................................................................................................SETTING, *, 4, 64, 6

Used to rotate the feed roller and registration roller for cleaning.

Voice test......................................................................................................................SETTING, *, 4, 74, 7

Used to test the voice guidance.test the voice guidance.

Set or Clear Network Switches...................................................................................SETTING, *, 5, 1

Used to set or clear Network switches.

Security function maintenance ..................................................................................SETTING, *, 5, 2

Used to edit the security function regardless of the registered protect passcode.

Black ratio measuring .................................................................................................SETTING, *, 5, 4

Used to measure the black ratio of any document.

Service function menu ................................................................................................SETTING, *, 7, 7

Displays all the available field service program modes’ shortcuts.

Update the software ....................................................................................................SETTING, *, 9, 6

Used to upgrade the software using the CF (Compact Flash) card.

Quick installation mode ..............................................................................................SETTING, *, 9, 9

You can set the initial setting mode, consumable order sheet setting and service reportsetting continuously.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-3

3.2 Machine Parameter Adjustment3.2.1 Setting the Machine ParametersThese switches are used to program internal machine parameters. The primary back up batterymaintains these settings if power is lost.

1. From standby, press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <0>.

2. Select “Parameters Edit” and press [Enter].

3. Call up the desired switch by pressing or , or by pressing the numeric keypad.

4. Press [Enter].

5. To navigate through the machine parameter settings:

• The bits are ranged from 7 (left) to 0 (right).

• Press or of the cursor key to move the cursor.• Press <0> or <1> on the numeric keypad, or or , to change the bit value.

• Press [Enter] to save the setting of the displayed parameter and return to the machine pa-rameter edit screen.

• Press [Cancel] not to save the setting of the displayed parameter.

6. If you want to set other machine parameters, repeat step 3-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7.

7. Press <Reset> to return the machine to standby.

Note: You can confirm the initial setting of each Machine parameter by the Machine Parameters List.The Machine Parameters List will be printed by pressing <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <0><Menu>, <*>, <1>, <0>.

3.2.2 Clearing the Machine ParametersResets the machine parameters to factory defaults.


2. Select “Clear Parameters” and press [Enter].

3. Press [Yes]. The machine parameters will reset to factory defaults.

Note: To finish the operation without clearing the parameters, press [No].

4. Press <Reset> to return the machine to standby.<Reset> to return the machine to standby.to return the machine to standby.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-4

Machine Parameter 000 --- Factory use only

Machine Parameter 001

Switch InitialSetting

Adjust Usage/Comments

7 0 Factory use only


5 0 Factory use only4 0 Factory use only

3 0 Output attenuation See table belowNote: The setting of this switch is available onlywhen setting other than 0 dB (and this setting isused instead of Memory Switch 011, bit 3-0.)

2 0

1 0

0 0

Machine Parameter 001…Output attenuation

Switch -15

dB

-14

dB

-13

dB

-12

dB

-11

dB

-10

dB

-9

dB

-8

dB

-7

dB

-6

dB

-5

dB

-4

dB

-3

dB

-2

dB

-1

dB

-0

dB

3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

Machine Parameter 002 ~ 006 --- Factory use only




7 0 DRAM capacity indication

(Spare)6 0 DRAM capacity indication

(Slot 2)This switch indicates the DRAM capacity.(This switch is read only, do not set any character) You can see the memory capacity by how many “1”is indicated on the LCD. One “1” means 8MB.For example, if three “1” are indicated,i.e. “00000111”, the DRAM capacity is8MB x 3 = 24MB.x 3 = 24MB.3 = 24MB.

5 0

4 0

3 0 DRAM capacity indication(Slot 1)2 0

1 0

0 0 DRAM capacity indicationon the Main PCBn the Main PCBthe Main PCBMain PCB

Machine Parameter 008 and 009 --- Factory use only

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-5




7 0 ADF scanner registrationadjust (Horizontal)

Copy/Scan mode

Adjusts the start point toscan the document.The plus setting increasesthe left margin and the minussetting decreases it.

1 step = 5 / 600 dpi (0.2116 mm)

Switch 76543210 Settings

+25 steps 00011001 +5.29 mm : 00010000 +3.39 mm

: 00001000 +1.69mm : 00000000 0 mm : 10001000 -1.69 mm : 10010000 -3.39 mm :-25 steps 10011001 -5.29 mm

Note: To adjust fax mode, adjust machineparameter 453.

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 1

2 1

1 1

0 1


SwitchInitial

SettingAdjust Usage/Comments

7 0 Adjustment of the scanning

stretching and squeezing forADF.(Horizontal)

The plus setting stretches theimage data and theminus setting squeezes it.

Each setting changes by0.1%


00001111 +1.5 % : 00001000 +0.8 % : 00000100 +0.4 % : 00000010 +0.2 % 00000001 +0.1 %01 +0.1 %1 +0.1 % 00000000 0 % Initial setting 10000001 -0.1 %10000001 -0.1 %0000001 -0.1 %01 -0.1 %1 -0.1 % 10000010 -0.2 %10000010 -0.2 %0000010 -0.2 % :

10000100 -0.4 % : 10001000 -0.8 % :

10001111 -1.5 %

6 05 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-6


SwitchInitial


7 1 Adjustment of the scanningstretching and squeezing forADF.(Vertical)

Fax/Scan mode

The plus setting squeezesthe image data and theminus setting stretches it.


Switch 76543210 Settings 00111111 +6.3 % : 00011111 +3.1 % :

00001111 +1.5 % : 00001000 +0.8 % : 00000001 +0.1 %01 +0.1 %1 +0.1 % 00000000 0 % Standard 10000001 -0.1 %10000001 -0.1 %0000001 -0.1 %001 -0.1 %1 -0.1 %-0.1 %0.1 %1 %% : 10001000 -0.8 % : 10001111 -1.5 % : 10011111 -3.1 %

: 10111111 -6.3 %

For copy mode, adjust machine parameter 430.

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 1

1 0

0 1


SwitchInitial


7 1 Leading edge documentmargin adjustment (ADF)

Adjusts the leading edgemargin from DocumentSensor 2 (DS2) to the startof scanning the position.

1 step = 2 / 300 dpi (0.0847 x 2 mm)


63 steps 00111111 +10.67 mm

: 00100000 +5.41 mm : 00010000 +2.71 mm : 00001000 +1.35 mm : 00000000 27.8 mm : 10001000 -1.35 mm : 10010000 -2.71 mm :

10100000 -5.41 mm :-63step 101111111 -10.67 mm

Note: To adjust copy mode, add the steps inmachine parameter 431.

Note: To adjust fax mode, add the steps in machineparameter 086, 087, 088 or 089.

6 0

5 0

4 03 1

2 0

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-7


SwitchInitial


7 1 Trailing edge documentmargin adjustment (ADF)

Adjusts document feed afterthe trailing edge of a docu-

ment passes DocumentSensor 2 (DS2).

1 step = 2 / 300 dpi (0.0847 x 2 mm)


63 steps 00111111 +10.67 mm : 00100000 +5.41 mm

: 00010000 +2.71 mm : 00001000 +1.35 mm : 00000000 27.8 mm : 10001000 -1.35 mm : 10010000 -2.71 mm : 10100000 -5.41 mm :

-63step 101111111 -10.67 mm

Note: To adjust copy mode, add the steps inmachine parameter 432.

Note: To adjust fax mode, add the steps inmachine parameter 076(Normal), 077(Fine),078(Super-fine/Hyper-fine), 079(Ultra-fine).

6 0

5 1

4 1

3 0

2 1

1 0

0 1

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-8


SwitchInitial


7 0 FBS scanner registrationadjustment (Horizontal)

Copy/Scan mode

Adjusts the start point toscan the document.The plus setting increasesthe left margin and the minussetting decreases it.

1 step = 5 / 600 dpi (0.2116 mm)


25 steps 00011001 +5.29 mm : 00010000 +3.39 mm

: 00001000 +1.69 mm : 00000000 0 mm : 10001000 -1.69 mm : 10010000 -3.39 mm :-25 steps 10011001 -5.29 mm

Note: For adjust fax mode, adjust machineparameter 454.

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 1

2 0

1 0

0 0


SwitchInitial


7 0 Adjustment of the scanningstretching and squeezing forFBS..(Horizontal)

The plus setting stretches

the image data and theminus setting squeezes it.



00001111 +1.5 % : 00001000 +0.8 % :

00000100 +0.4 % : 00000010 +0.2 % 00000001 +0.1 %01 +0.1 %1 +0.1 % 00000000 0 % Initial setting 10000001 -0.1 %10000001 -0.1 %0000001 -0.1 %01 -0.1 %1 -0.1 % 10000010 -0.2 %10000010 -0.2 %0000010 -0.2 % : 10000100 -0.4 % : 10001000 -0.8 % : 10001111 -1.5 %

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-9


SwitchInitial


7 0 Adjustment of the scanningstretching and squeezing forFBS.(Vertical)

Fax/Scan modeThe plus setting squeezesthe image data and theminus setting stretches it.



00111111 +6.3 % : 00001000 +0.8 %

: 00000100 +0.4 % : 00000010 +0.2 % 00000001 +0.1 %01 +0.1 %1 +0.1 % 00000000 0 % Initial setting 10000001 -0.1 %10000001 -0.1 %0000001 -0.1 %01 -0.1 %1 -0.1 % 10000010 -0.2 %10000010 -0.2 %0000010 -0.2 % : 10000100 -0.4 % : 10001000 -0.8 % :

10111111 -6.3 %

For copy mode, adjust machine parameter 435.

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0


SwitchInitial


7 1 Leading edge documentmargin adjustment for FBSor FBSFBS

Copy/Scan mode

Adjusts the leading edgemargin after Home SensorOFF to the start of scanningthe position.

Each setting changesby 0.140793616 mm.mm.mm.


31 steps 00011111 +4.36 mm1 steps 00011111 +4.36 mm :

16 steps 00010000 +2.25 mmsteps 00010000 +2.25 mm010000 +2.25 mm10000 +2.25 mm :8 steps 00001000 +1.13 mmsteps 00001000 +1.13 mm001000 +1.13 mm1000 +1.13 mm :4 steps 00000100 +0.56 mmsteps 00000100 +0.56 mm000100 +0.56 mm0100 +0.56 mm : 00000000 5 mm :-4 steps 10000100 -0.56mmsteps 10000100 -0.56mm10000100 -0.56mm0000100 -0.56mm0100 -0.56mm-0.56mm-0.56mm0.56mm :-8 steps 10001000 -1.13mmsteps 10001000 -1.13mm10001000 -1.13mm0001000 -1.13mm1000 -1.13mm000 -1.13mm00 -1.13mm-1.13mm-1.13mm1.13mm :-16 steps 10010000 -2.25 mmsteps 10010000 -2.25 mm10010000 -2.25 mm0010000 -2.25 mm10000 -2.25 mm0000 -2.25 mm00 -2.25 mm-2.25 mm-2.25 mmmm

:-31 steps 10100000 -4.36 mm1 steps 10100000 -4.36 mm10100000 -4.36 mm0100000 -4.36 mm-4.36 mmmm

For copy mode, add the value of machine parameter436.

For fax / mode, adjust machine parameter 455.

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 02 0

1 1

0 1


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-10


SwitchInitial


7 0 Mirror carriage standbyposition adjustment

Adjusts the number of thesteps from the home sensor

of the mirror carriage OFFto the standby position.

1 step = 0.140793616 mm


63 steps 00111111 +8.87 mm :60 steps 00111100 +8.45 mm

:50 steps 00110010 +7.04 mm :30 steps 00010100 +2.82 mm :10 steps 00001010 +1.41 mm :3 steps 00000011 +0.42 mm2 steps 00000010 +0.28 mm1 step 00000001 +0.14 mm 00000000 20 mm

When Switch 7 is “1”, it means “ - ”. For example,

“10000001” means “-0.14 mm”.4 mm”.mm”.

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 1

2 1

1 0

0 0


SwitchInitial


7 1 Mirror carriage transfer modeposition adjustment

Adjusts the number of thesteps from the home sensorof the mirror carriage OFFto the transfer mode position.

1 step = 0.140793616 mm


63 steps 00111111 +8.87 mm :60 steps 00111100 +8.45 mm :50 steps 00110010 +7.04 mm

:30 steps 00010100 +2.82 mm :10 steps 00001010 +1.41 mm :3 steps 00000011 +0.42 mm2 steps 00000010 +0.28 mm1 step 00000001 +0.14 mm 00000000 20 mm

When Switch 7 is “1”, it means “ - ”. For example,“10000001” means “-0.14 mm”.4 mm”.mm”.

Note: After adjusting the Mirror carriage transfermode position, adjust Machine Parameter 013and 014.

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 1

2 1

1 10 1


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-11


SwitchInitial


7 0 Scanning densitylevel adjustment in normalresolution.

Switch 7654321001111111 Darkest setting

:00001000

:

00000000 Initial setting:10001000

:11111111 Lightest setting

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0


SwitchInitial


7 0 Scanning density leveladjustment in fine resolution.


:00001000

:00000000 Initial setting

:10001000


6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0


SwitchInitial

Setting Adjust Usage/Comments

7 0 Scanning density leveladjustment in super-fineresolution.


:00001000


:10001000


6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-12


SwitchInitial


7 0 Scanning density leveladjustment in hyper-fineresolution.


:00001000

:

00000000 Initial setting:10001000


6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0


SwitchInitial


7 0 Scanning density leveladjustment in ultra-fine

(600dpi x 600dpi) resolution.x 600dpi) resolution.600dpi) resolution.


:00001000


:10001000


6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0


SwitchInitial


7 1 Scanning density leveladjustment in backgroundmode.


:00001000

:00000000

:10001000


:

11111111 Lightest setting

6 1

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-13



SwitchInitial




5 0 Left side edge documentmargin adjustment

Each setting changes by0.4233 mm.

Left side means the side ofthe scanning position.

Adjust this parameter when black line appears onthe left edge of the printouts in following cases:• While paper selection is set to “Auto”, A4 or B4

paper is selected in rotate printing• The document set on the FBS is A5 or B5 , or

the vertical length of the document is shorter thanA5 or B5 .

Switch 5 4 3 2 1 0 Settings1 1 1 1 1 1 26.67 mm :1 1 1 1 0 0 25.40 mm :

1 1 0 0 1 0 21.17 mm :1 0 1 0 0 0 16.93 mm :0 1 1 1 1 0 12.70 mm :0 1 0 1 0 1 8.47 mm :0 0 0 1 0 1 2.11 mm (Initial setting) :0 0 0 0 0 1 0.42 mm0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 mm

4 0

3 0

2 1

1 0

0 1



SwitchInitial



Fax modeNormal Resolution

Adjusts document feed afterthe trailing edge of a docu-ment passes DocumentSensor 2 (DS2).

1 step = 2 / 300 dpi (0.0847 x 2 mm)


31 steps 00011111 +5.25 mm : 00010000 +2.71 mm : 00001000 +1.35 mm : 00000000 27.8 mm : 10001000 -1.35 mm : 10010000 -2.71 mm :-31step 10001111 -5.25 mm

Note: Add these steps to machine parameter014, when adjusting the steps for normal

transmission.

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 1

2 01 0

0 1

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-14


SwitchInitial



Fax modeFine Resolution


1 step = 2 / 300 dpi (0.0847 x 2 mm)


31 steps 00011111 +5.25 mm : 00010000 +2.71 mm

: 00001000 +1.35 mm : 00000000 27.8 mm : 10001000 -1.35 mm : 10010000 -2.71 mm :-31step 100011111 -5.25 mm

Note: Add these steps to machine parameter 014,when adjusting the steps for fine transmission.

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 1


SwitchInitial



Fax modeSuper-fine/Hyper-fine Reso-lution


1 step = 2 / 300 dpi (0.0847 x 2 mm)


31 steps 00011111 +5.25 mm

: 00010000 +2.71 mm : 00001000 +1.35 mm : 00000000 27.8 mm : 10001000 -1.35 mm : 10010000 -2.71 mm :-31step 10001111 -5.25 mm

Note: Add these steps to machine parameter 014,when adjusting the steps for super-fine orhyper-fine transmission.

6 0

5 0

4 03 0

2 0

1 1

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-15


SwitchInitial



Fax modeUltra-fine Resolution


1 step = 2 / 300 dpi (0.0847 x 2 mm)


31 steps 00011111 +5.25 mm : 00010000 +2.71 mm

: 00001000 +1.35 mm : 00000000 27.8 mm : 10001000 -1.35 mm : 10010000 -2.71 mm :-31step 10001111 -5.25 mm

Note: Add these steps to machine parameter014, when adjusting the steps for ultra-finetransmission.

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0



SwitchInitial




Fax modeDocument type: Normal

1 step = 2 / 300 dpi (0.0847 x 2 mm)


31 steps 00011111 +5.25 mm : 00010000 +2.71 mm : 00001000 +1.35 mm : 00000000 0 mm : 10001000 -1.35 mm : 10010000 -2.71 mm :-31 step 10011111 -5.25 mm

Note: Add these steps to machine parameter 013,when adjusting the steps for fax mode /normal scanning.

6 0

5 04 0

3 0

2 0

1 1

0 1

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-16


SwitchInitial



Adjusts the leading edgemargin from Document

Sensor 2 (DS2) to the startof scanning the position.

Fax modeDocument type: Fine

1 step = 2 / 300 dpi (0.0847 x 2 mm)


31 steps 00011111 +5.25 mm : 00010000 +2.71 mm

: 00001000 +1.35 mm : 00000000 0 mm : 10001000 -1.35 mm : 10010000 -2.71 mm :-31step 10011111 -5.25 mm

Note: Add these steps to machine parameter 013,when adjusting the steps for fax mode / finescanning.

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 1

0 1


SwitchInitial


7 1 Leading edge document

margin adjustment (ADF)


Fax modeDocument type: Super Fine /Hyper Fine

1 step = 2 / 300 dpi (0.0847 x 2 mm)


31 steps 00011111 +5.25 mm : 00010000 +2.71 mm : 00001000 +1.35 mm : 00000000 0 mm : 10001000 -1.35 mm : 10010000 -2.71 mm :

-31 step 10011111 -5.25 mm

Note: Add these steps to machine parameter 013,when adjusting the steps for fax mode /super-fine or hyper-fine scanning.

6 05 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 1

0 1

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-17


SwitchInitial





Fax modeDocument type: Ultra Fine(600 dpi)1 step = 2 / 300 dpi (0.0847 x 2 mm)


31 steps 00011111 +5.25 mm : 00010000 +2.71 mm

: 00001000 +1.35 mm : 00000000 0 mm : 10001000 -1.35 mm : 10010000 -2.71 mm :-31 step 10011111 -5.25 mm

Note: Add these steps to machine parameter 013,when adjusting the steps for fax mode / ultra-fine (600dpi) scanning.

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 1

0 0



SwitchInitial


7 0 Printer registrationadjustment (Horizontal) atthe 1st cassette for normalprinting.

Adjusts the start point toprint.

The plus setting increasesthe left margin and the minussetting decreases it.

The setting changes bysetting changes by0.1mm.

Note: See MachineParameter 110 for therotate printing.


127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm :32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm :16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm :8 steps 00001000 +0.8 mm : 00000000 0 mm

:-8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm :-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm :-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm

Note: Set this switch after setting the margin to “0mm” in Unique Switch 52. Then, after settingthis switch, set the margin to the initial settingin Unique Switch 52.

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-18


SwitchInitial


7 0 Printer registration adjust-ment (Horizontal) atthe 2nd cassette for normalprinting.






127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm :32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm

:16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm :8 steps 00001000 +0.8 mm : 00000000 0 mm :-8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm :-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm :-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm


6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0


SwitchInitial


7 0 Printer registration adjust-ment (Horizontal) atthe 3rd cassette for normal

printing.




Note: See Machine

Parameter 112 for therotate printing.


127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm

:32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm :16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm :8 steps 00001000 +0.8 mm : 00000000 0 mm :-8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm :-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm :

-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm


6 0

5 0

4 03 0

2 0

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-19


SwitchInitial


7 0 Printer registration adjust-ment (Horizontal) atthe 4th cassette for normalprinting.






127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm :32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm



6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0



SwitchInitial


7 0 Printer registrationadjustment (Horizontal) atthe Bypass tray for normalprinting.



The setting changes bysetting changes by

0.1mm.



127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm :32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm :16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm :8 steps 00001000 +0.8 mm : 00000000 0 mm :-8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm :-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm :-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm


6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-20


SwitchInitial


7 0 Printer registrationadjustment (Horizontal) atthe duplex printing for normalprinting.





127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm :32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm



6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0



SwitchInitial


7 0 Printer registrationadjustment (Horizontal) atthe 1st cassette for rotateprinting.




0.1mm.

Note: See MachineParameter 100 for thenormal printing.


127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm :32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm :16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm :8 steps 00001000 +0.8 mm : 00000000 0 mm :-8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm

:-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm :-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm


6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-21


SwitchInitial


7 0 Printer registration adjust-ment (Horizontal) atthe 2nd cassette for rotatelprinting.






127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm :32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm



6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0


SwitchInitial


7 0 Printer registration adjust-ment (Horizontal) atthe 3rd cassette for rotate

printing.






127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm


-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm


6 0

5 0

4 03 0

2 0

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-23


SwitchInitial


7 0 Printer registrationadjustment (Horizontal) at du-plex printing for rotate print-ing.




Note: See MachineParameter 108 for the

normal printing.


127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm :32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm



6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0



SwitchInitial

Setting


7 0 Printer registrationadjustment (Horizontal) atthe 1st cassette for normalprinting.

Adjusts the ending point toprint.





127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm :32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm :16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm :8 steps 00001000 +0.8 mm : 00000000 0 mm :

-8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm :-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm :-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm


6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-24


SwitchInitial


7 0 Printer registration adjust-ment (Horizontal) atthe 2nd cassette for normalprinting.






127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm :32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm



6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0


SwitchInitial


7 0 Printer registration adjust-ment (Horizontal) atthe 3rd cassette for normalprinting.




Note: See Machine

Parameter 132 for therotate printing.




6 0

5 0

4 03 0

2 0

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-25


SwitchInitial


7 0 Printer registration adjust-ment (Horizontal) atthe 4th cassette for normalprinting.






127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm :32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm



6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0



SwitchInitial


7 0 Printer registrationadjustment (Horizontal) atthe Bypass tray for normalprinting.




0.1mm.




:-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm :-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm


6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-26


SwitchInitial


7 0 Printer registrationadjustment (Horizontal) atthe duplex printing for normalprinting.





127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm :32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm



6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0



SwitchInitial


7 0 Printer registrationadjustment (Horizontal) atthe 1st cassette for rotateprinting.




0.1mm.




:-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm :-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm


6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-27


SwitchInitial


7 0 Printer registration adjust-ment (Horizontal) atthe 2nd cassette for rotatelprinting.






127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm :32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm



6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0


SwitchInitial


7 0 Printer registration adjust-ment (Horizontal) atthe 3rd cassette for rotate

printing.






127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm


-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm


6 0

5 0

4 03 0

2 0

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-28


SwitchInitial


7 0 Printer registration adjust-ment (Horizontal) atthe 4th cassette for rotateprinting.






127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm :32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm



6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0



SwitchInitial


7 0 Printer registrationadjustment (Horizontal) atthe Bypass tray for rotateprinting.




0.1mm.




:-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm :-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm


6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-29


SwitchInitial


7 0 Printer registrationadjustment (Horizontal) atduplex printing for rotateprinting.





normal printing.


127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm :32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm



6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0



SwitchInitial


7 0 Printer registrationadjustment.

Adjusts the left margin at the1st cassette for normal print-ing.


The setting changes bysetting changes by1 mm.




:-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm :-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm


6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-30


SwitchInitial



Adjusts the left margin at the2nd cassette for normal print-

ing.


TThe setting changes by 1setting changes by 1mm.



127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm :32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm



6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0


SwitchInitial



Adjusts the left margin at the3rd cassette for normal print-ing.





127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm :32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm :16 steps 00010000 +1.6 mm :8 steps 00001000 +0.8 mm : 00000000 0 mm :-8 steps 11110111 -0.8 mm :-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm

:-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm


6 0

5 04 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-31


SwitchInitial



Adjusts the left margin at the4th cassette for normal print-

ing.





127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm :32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm



6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0



SwitchInitial



Adjusts the left margin at theBypass tray for normal print-ing.



16 dots (0.6773 mm).






6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-32


SwitchInitial



Adjusts the left margin at du-plex printing for normal print-

ing.


The setting changes bysetting changes by16 dots (0.6773 mm).



127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm :32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm



6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0



SwitchInitial



Adjusts the left margin at the1st cassette for rotatel print-ing.


The setting changes bysetting changes by1 mm.




:-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm :-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm


6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-33


SwitchInitial



Adjusts the left margin at the2nd cassette for rotate print-

ing.





127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm :32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm



6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0


SwitchInitial



Adjusts the left margin at the3rd cassette for rotate print-ing.






:-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm


6 0

5 04 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-34


SwitchInitial



Adjusts the left margin at the4th cassette for rotate print-

ing.





127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm :32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm



6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0



SwitchInitial



Adjusts the left margin at theBypass tray for rotate print-ing.



16 dots (0.6773 mm).






6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-35


SwitchInitial



Adjusts the left margin atthe duplex printing for rotate

printing.


The setting changes bysetting changes by16 dots (0.6773 mm).



127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm :32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm



6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0

Machine Parameter 159 --- Factory use onlyMachine Parameter 160

SwitchInitial



Adjusts the right margin atthe 1st cassette for normalprinting.

The plus setting decreasesthe right margin and theminus setting increases it.

The setting changes bysetting changes by1mm.


rotate printing.


127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm


-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm


6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-36


SwitchInitial



Adjusts the right margin atthe 2nd cassette for normal

printing.





127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm :32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm



6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0


SwitchInitial



Adjusts the right margin atthe 3rd cassette for normalprinting.




rotate printing.




6 0

5 04 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-37


SwitchInitial



Adjusts the right margin atthe 4th cassette for normal

printing.





127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm :32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm



6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0



SwitchInitial



Adjusts the right margin atthe Bypass tray for normalprinting.






:-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm :-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm


6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-38


SwitchInitial



Adjusts the right margin atduplex printing for normal

printing.





127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm :32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm



6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0



SwitchInitial



Adjusts the right margin atthe 1st cassette for rotatelprinting.







6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-39


SwitchInitial



Adjusts the right margin atthe 2nd cassette for rotate

printing.





127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm :32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm



6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0


SwitchInitial



Adjusts the right margin atthe 3rd cassette for rotateprinting.




normal printing.




6 0

5 04 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-40


SwitchInitial



Adjusts the right margin atthe 4th cassette for rotate

printing.





127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm :32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm



6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0



SwitchInitial



Adjusts the right margin atthe Bypass tray for rotateprinting.






:-16 steps 11101111 -1.6 mm :-127 steps 10000000 -12.7 mm


6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-41


SwitchInitial



Adjusts the right margin atduplex printing for rotate

printing.





127 steps 01111111 +12.7 mm :32 steps 00100000 +3.2 mm



6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0






7 0 Adjustment of the scanningstretching and squeezing forADF.(Vertical)

Copy modeThe plus setting squeezesthe image data and theminus setting stretches it.


Switch 76543210 Settings 00111111 +6.3 % : 00011111 +3.1 % : 00001111 +1.5 % : 00001000 +0.8 % : 00000001 +0.1 %01 +0.1 %1 +0.1 % 00000000 0 % Standard 10000001 -0.1 %10000001 -0.1 %0000001 -0.1 %001 -0.1 %1 -0.1 %-0.1 %0.1 %1 %% : 10001000 -0.8 % : 10001111 -1.5 % : 10011111 -3.1 % : 10111111 -6.3 %

For fax and scan mode, adjust machine parameter012.

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-42


SwitchInitial





1 step = 2 / 300 dpi (0.0847 x 2 mm)

Switch 76543210 Settings31 steps 00011111 +5.25 mm :30 steps 00011110 +5.08 mm :

20 steps 00010100 +3.38 mm :10 steps 00001010 +1.69 mm : 00000000 :-10 steps 10001010 -1.69 mm :-20 steps 10010100 -3.38 mm :-30 steps 10011110 -5.08 mm :-31 steps 10011111 -5.25 mm

Note: These steps are added to the steps set inmachine parameter 013.

Note: Adjust the steps in 600 dpi copy.

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0


SwitchInitial




1 step = 2 / 300 dpi (0.0847 x 2 mm)

Switch 76543210 Settings31 steps 00011111 +5.25 mm :30 steps 00011110 +5.08 mm :20 steps 00010100 +3.38 mm :10 steps 00001010 +1.69 mm : 00000000 :-10 steps 10001010 -1.69 mm :


Note: These steps are added to the steps set inmachine parameter 014.

Note: Adjust the steps in 600 dpi copy.

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 1

1 0

0 0


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-43


SwitchInitial


7 0 Adjustment of the scanningstretching and squeezing forFBS.(Vertical)

Copy modeThe plus setting squeezesthe image data and theminus setting stretches it.



00111111 +6.3 % : 00001111 +1.5 %

: 00001000 +0.8 % : 00000100 +0.4 % : 00000010 +0.2 % 00000001 +0.1 %01 +0.1 %1 +0.1 % 00000000 0 % Initial setting 10000001 -0.1 %10000001 -0.1 %0000001 -0.1 %01 -0.1 %1 -0.1 % 10000010 -0.2 %10000010 -0.2 %0000010 -0.2 % : 10000100 -0.4 % :

10001000 -0.8 % : 10001111 -1.5 % : 00111111 -6.3 %


6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0


Switch

Initial

Setting Adjust Usage/Comments7 0 Leading edge document

margin adjustment For FBSor FBSFBS

Copy modeAdjusts the leading edgemargin after Home SensorOFF to the start of scanningthe position.



31 steps 00011111 +4.36 mm1 steps 00011111 +4.36 mm :16 steps 00010000 +2.25 mmsteps 00010000 +2.25 mm010000 +2.25 mm10000 +2.25 mm :8 steps 00001000 +1.13 mmsteps 00001000 +1.13 mm001000 +1.13 mm1000 +1.13 mm :4 steps 00000100 +0.56 mmsteps 00000100 +0.56 mm000100 +0.56 mm0100 +0.56 mm : 00000000 5 mm Initial setting :

-4 steps 10000100 -0.56mmsteps 10000100 -0.56mm10000100 -0.56mm0000100 -0.56mm0100 -0.56mm-0.56mm-0.56mm0.56mm :-8 steps 10001000 -1.13mmsteps 10001000 -1.13mm10001000 -1.13mm0001000 -1.13mm1000 -1.13mm000 -1.13mm00 -1.13mm-1.13mm-1.13mm1.13mm :-16 steps 10010000 -2.25 mmsteps 10010000 -2.25 mm10010000 -2.25 mm0010000 -2.25 mm10000 -2.25 mm0000 -2.25 mm00 -2.25 mm-2.25 mm-2.25 mmmm :-31 steps 10100000 -4.36 mm1 steps 10100000 -4.36 mm10100000 -4.36 mm0100000 -4.36 mm-4.36 mmmm

Adjust the leading edge document margin for copymode add this value to machine parameter 018.


6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-44

Machine Parameter 437 and 438

SwitchInitial


7 0 Lamp check times This determines how many times to check the lampbefore correcting the shading data. When the it iscold and lamp error is easy to occur, check the lampmore times if it ready.

The checking time is a total of value of the machineparameter 437 value integral multiple with 256 andthe value of machine parameter 438.

The initial setting is five times.

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-45


SwitchInitial


7 1 Document skew adjustment

1 step = 1 / 300 dpi (0.08466 mm)

This sets the flexible volume at the separator roller.If the flexible volume is high, the document skewwill improve but thin paper may easy to jam. Switch 76543210 Settings


:-120 steps 11111000 -10.16 mm

6 0

5 0

4 1

3 0

2 1

1 0

0 0


SwitchInitial


7 0 Adjusts the start point to scan

the document.

Fax mode

1 step = 5 / 600 dpi (0.2116 mm)

Adjusts the start point to scan the document using

the ADF in fax mode.The plus setting makes to start the point backwardthan the standard point and the minus settingmakes the point forward .

Switch 76543210 Settings25 steps 00011001 +5.29 mm :20 steps 00010100 +4.23 mm :10 steps 00001010 +2.12 mm :5 steps 00000101 +1.05 mm

: 00000000 0 mm :-5 steps 10000101 -1.05 mm :-10 steps 10001010 -2.12 mm :-20 steps 10010100 -4.23 mm :-25 steps 10011001 -5.29 mm

Note: For copy/scan mode, adjust machine

parameter 010.

6 05 0

4 0

3 1

2 1

1 0

0 1

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-46


SwitchInitial


7 0 Adjusts the start point toscan the document.

Fax mode

1 step = 5 / 600 dpi (0.2116 mm)

Adjusts the start point to scan the document usingthe FBS in fax mode.The plus setting makes to start the point backwardthan the standard point and the minus settingmakes the point forward .

Switch 76543210 Settings25 steps 00011001 +5.29 mm :20 steps 00010100 +4.23 mm :10 steps 00001010 +2.12 mm :5 steps 00000101 +1.05 mm : 00000000 0 mm :-5 steps 10000101 -1.05 mm

:-10 steps 10001010 -2.12 mm :-20 steps 10010100 -4.23 mm :-25 steps 10011001 -5.29 mm

Note: For copy/scan mode, adjust machineparameter 015.

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 1

2 1

1 1

0 0


SwitchInitial


7 0 Leading edge documentmargin adjustment for FBSor FBSFBS

Fax modeAdjusts the leading edgemargin after Home SensorOFF to the start of scanningthe position.



31 steps 00011111 +4.36 mm1 steps 00011111 +4.36 mm :16 steps 00010000 +2.25 mmsteps 00010000 +2.25 mm010000 +2.25 mm10000 +2.25 mm :8 steps 00001000 +1.13 mmsteps 00001000 +1.13 mm001000 +1.13 mm1000 +1.13 mm :

4 steps 00000100 +0.56 mmsteps 00000100 +0.56 mm000100 +0.56 mm0100 +0.56 mm : 00000000 5 mm :-4 steps 10000100 -0.56mmsteps 10000100 -0.56mm10000100 -0.56mm0000100 -0.56mm0100 -0.56mm-0.56mm-0.56mm0.56mm :-8 steps 10001000 -1.13mmsteps 10001000 -1.13mm10001000 -1.13mm0001000 -1.13mm1000 -1.13mm000 -1.13mm00 -1.13mm-1.13mm-1.13mm1.13mm :-16 steps 10010000 -2.25 mmsteps 10010000 -2.25 mm10010000 -2.25 mm0010000 -2.25 mm10000 -2.25 mm0000 -2.25 mm00 -2.25 mm-2.25 mm-2.25 mmmm :-31 steps 10100000 -4.36 mm1 steps 10100000 -4.36 mm10100000 -4.36 mm0100000 -4.36 mm-4.36 mmmm

For copy/scan mode, adjust machine parameter

018.

6 0

5 0

4 1

3 1

2 0

1 0

0 0


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-47


Machine Parameter 463 ~ 492

SwitchInitial


7 0 White balance adjustment

See next page which mode

to adjust

Switch 76543210

32 steps 00100000 + Darkest setting

:16 steps 00010000 :8 steps 00001000 :4 steps 00000100 :0 step 00000000 Standard :-4 step 10000100 :-8 step 10001000 :-16step 10010000 :-32step 10100000 -Lightest setting

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-48

White balance adjustment

Mode Document type Resolution Binalize method ContrastMachine

parameter

Copy Text 600 dpi Error diffusion Normal 463

Other than normal 464

Photo/Text Normal 465


Photo Normal 467

Other than normalBachground Normal 468

Other than normal

Scan Text 600 dpi Error diffusion Normal 469




Photo Normal 473

Other than normal

Bachground Normal 474

Other than normal

Text 300 dpi Normal 475Other than normal 476



Photo Normal 479

Other than normal


Other than normal

Text 200 dpi Normal 481




Photo Normal 485Other than normal


Other than normal

Fax Normal, Fine, Super-,Hyper-, Ultra-fime

Simlpe binalize All contrasts 487

Background All contrasts 488

Grayscale 200 dpi Error diffusion Normal 489

Other than normal

400 dpi Normal 490

Other than normal

600 dpi Normal 491

Other than normal

200 dpi Dither Normal 492

Other than normal

See former page how to adjust the parameter.


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-49


SwitchInitial


7 0 PCL Personality Switch 76543210

00000001 PCL (Initial setting) 00000010 PCL XL

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 1


SwitchInitial


7 0 PCL Orientationy Switch 76543210

00000000 Portrait (Initial setting)

00000001 Landscape

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0


SwitchInitial


7 0 PCL Orientationy Switch 76543210

00000000 Letter 00000001 Ledger 00000010 Legal 00000011 Executive 00000100 A3 00000101 A4 (Initial setting) 00000110 A5 00000111 A6 00001000 F4 00001001 B4 (JIS) 00001010 B5 (JIS)

00001101 Half Letter 00001110 COM10 00010000 DL 00010001 Postcard 00010100 Custom

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 1

1 0

0 1


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-50


SwitchInitial


7 0 PCL Paper source Switch 76543210

00000000 Auto (Initial setting) 00000010 Cassette 1 00000011 Cassette 2

00000100 Cassette 3 00000101 Cassette 4 00000110 Bypass tray

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0


SwitchInitial


7 0 PCL Default Media Type Switch 76543210

00000000 Plain (Initial setting) 00000001 Thick 00000010 Transparency 00000011 Envelope/Postcard

6 0

5 04 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-51

Machine Parameter 508 ~ 509 Default Font Number

Machin parameter 508 Machin parameter 509 Usage/Comments

Switch 76543210

00010000

00010000

00010000

00010000

00010000

00010000

00010000

00010000

00010000

00010000

00010000

00010000

00010001

01000000

01000001

01000010

01100000

01100000

01100000

01100000

01100010

01110000

0111000011110000

11110000

01111010

10110000

10110000

00001011

Switch 76543210

00000011

00000101

00000110

00010001

00010100

00010111

00011111

00101100

00110100

01001000

01100101

11001001

00001010

11011010

00101110

00000101

00000011

00000100

00001111

00101111

00000101

01010000

0110001001010000

01001101

10101010

00101011

00101101

00101110

Courier (Initial setting)

CG Times

Letter Gothic

CG Omega

Coronet

Nw Cent Schlbk

IT CA vant Gard

Clarendon

Univers

Antiq Olive

Garamond

Marigold

Albertus

Arial

Symbol

Times New Rmn

Courier PS

Helvetica

Palation

ITC Bookman

Times

Mincho

GothicP. Mincho

P. Gothic

Winding

Zapf Chancery

Zapf Dingbats

Symbol PC

NOTE: The invalid combination of font number and symbols are on page 3-53.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-52

Machine Parameter 510 ~ 511 Default Symbol


Switch 76543210

00000000

00000000

00000000

00000000

00000000

00000000

00000000

00000000

00000000

00000000

00000000

00000000

00000000

00000000

00000000

00000000

00000000

00000001

00000001

00000001

00000001

00000001

0000000100000001

00000001

00000001

00000001

00000001

00000001

00000001

00000010

00000010

00000010

00000010

00000010

00000010

Switch 76543210

00000100

00001001

00001110

00010011

00010101

00100101

00100110

00100111

00110101

01001110

01011110

10101101

10101110

10110100

11001010

11001110

11101010

00001101

00010101

00100101

00101010

00110100

0011010101001010

01010101

01110101

10001010

10010101

11001100

11110101

00110101

01001110

01101011

01101100

01101101

01110101

ISO 60: Danish/Norwegian

ISO 15: Italian

ISO 8859/1 Latin 1

ISO 11: Swedish

ISO 6: ASC ll

ISO 4: United Kingdom

ISO 69: French

ISO 21: German

Legal

ISO 8859/2 Latin 2

ISO 17: Spanish

PS Math

ISO 8859/5 Latin 5

Windows 3.1 Latin 5

Microsoft Publishing

ISO 8859/6 Latin6

Desk Top

Math-8

Roman-8

Windows 3.1 Latin 2

PC-1004

PC-8 TK, Code Page 437T

Windows 3.0 Latin 1Ps Text

PC-8 Cord Page 437 (Initial setting)

PC-8 D/N, Cord Page 437N

Macintosh

PC-850 Multilingual

HP 4000 ITC Zapf Dingbats

PI Font

PC-852 Latin 2

ISO 8859/1 Latin1

Windows 3.1j Latin

Windows 3.1 Baltic

Symbol

Windows 3.1 Latin 1

NOTE: The invalid combination of font number and symbols are on page 3-53.


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-53

Invalid combination of font number and symbols

Courier

CG Times

LetterGothic

CG Omega

Coronet

NwCentSchlbk

ITCAvantGardClarendon

Univers

AntiqOlive

Garamond

Marigold

Albertus

Arial

Symbol

TimesNewRmn

CourierPS

HelveticaPalatino

ITCBookman

Times

Mincho

GothicP.

MinchoP.

Gothic

Windings Zapf-Chancery

Zapf

Dingbats

SymbolPS

ISO 60: Danish/Norwegian

ISO 15: Italian

ISO 8859/1 Latin 1

ISO 11: Swedish

ISO 6: ASCII

ISO 4: United Kingdom

ISO 69: FrenchISO 21: German

Legal

ISO 8859/2 Latin 2

ISO 17: Spanish

PSMath

ISO 8859/5 Latin 5

Windows 3.1 Latin 5

Microsoft Publishing

ISO 8859/6 Latin 6

DeskTop

Math-8

Roman-8

Windows 3.1 Latin 2

PC-1004

PC-8 TK, Code Page 437T

Windows 3.0 Latin 1

PS Text

PC-8 Code Page 437

PC-8 D/N, Code Page 437N

Macintosh

PC-850 Multilingual

HP4000 ITC ZapfDingbats

PI Font

PC-852 Latin 2

ISO 8859/1 Latin 1

Windows 3.1j Latin

Windows 3.1 Baltic

Symbol

Windows 3.1 Latin 1

PC-775

Windings

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

InvalidInvalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

InvalidInvalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

InvalidInvalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

InvalidInvalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

Invalid

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-54

Machine Parameter 516 ~ 517 PCL X Resolutuion


Switch 76543210

00000001

00000010

Switch 76543210

00101100

01011000

300 dpi

600 dpi (Initial setting)

Machine Parameter 518 ~ 519 PCL X Resolutuion


Switch 76543210

00000001

00000010

Switch 76543210

00101100

01011000

300 dpi

600 dpi (Initial setting)

Machine Parameter 520 ~ 521 PCL Time-out period


Switch 76543210

00000000

00000000

00000000

:

00000000

:

00000000

:

00000001

:

00000001

:

00000011

:

11111111

Switch 76543210

00000000

00000001

00000010

:

01100100

:

11001000

:

00101100

:

11110100

:

00100000

:

111111111

Invalid

1 sec

2 sec

:

100 sec

:

200 sec

:

300 sec (Initial setting)

:

500 sec

:

800 sec

:

65535 sec

Machine Parameter 522 ~ 523 PCL Print copies


Switch 76543210

00000000

00000000

00000000

:

00000011

Switch 76543210

00000000

00000001

00000010

:

11100111

Invalid

1 copy (Initial setting)

2 copies

:

999 copies

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-55

Machine Parameter 524 ~ 525 PCL Time-out period


Switch 76543210

00000000

00000000

00000000

:

00000000

:

00000000

:

00000000

:

00000001

:

00000001

:

11111111

Switch 76543210

00000000

00000001

00000010

:

00001010

:

01100100

:

11001000

:

00101100

:

11110100

:

11111111

Invalid

1 sec

2 sec

:

10 sec (Initial setting)

:

100 sec

:

200 sec

:

300 sec

:

500 sec

:

65535 sec


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-56

Machine Parameter 532 ~ 533 Characters per inch


Switch 76543210

00000000

:

00000000

00000000

00000000

:

00000000

:

00000000

:

00000000

:

00000011

Switch 76543210

00000000

:

00000011

00000100

00000101

:

01011010

:

01100100

:

01101110

:

11100111

Invalid

:

Invalid

0.4 characters/inch

0.5 characters/inch

:

9.0 characters/inch

:

10.0 characters/inch (Initial setting)

:

11.0 characters/inch

:

99.9 characters/inch


Machine Parameter 536 ~ 537 PCL Size of Characters


Switch 76543210

00000000

00000000

:

00000000

:

00000000

:

0100111

Switch 76543210

00000000

00000001

:

01100100

:

01111000

:

00001101

Invalid0

1 point:

:

10.0 point

:

12.0 point (Initial setting)

:

999.7 point


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-57


SwitchInitial


7 0 PCL Line per page(1 line/page)

Switch 76543210

00000000 60 lines (Letter)(Initial setting) 00000001 Invalid :

00000100 Invalid 00000101 5 lines :

10000000 128 lines

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0


SwitchInitial


7 0 PCL Main Paper Source Switch 76543210

00000000 Cassette 1 (Initial setting) 00000010 Cassette 1 00000011 Cassette 2 00000110 Bypass Tray

6 0

5 04 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-58


SwitchInitial


7 0 Loop adjustment This switch adjust the paper loop at the timingroller.The more loop it is made, the more square theprintout becomes. At the same time, thin paper iseasy to jam

Switch 6543210 0000000 80 ms 0001000 170 ms 0010001 340 ms 0101010 420 ms 0110010 500 ms

When Switch 7 is “1”, it means “ - ”. For example,“10001000” means “-170 ms”.

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-59

Machine Parameter 860 ~ 879

SwitchInitial


7 0 Transfer current adjustment1 step = 0.5 µA

See table below for adjustingpaper size and type.

When the all black printed images are light,increase the current.When the half-tone printed images are light orwhen the images drop out in white spots, decreasethe current.

Switch 3210 1111 7.5 µA 1110 7.0 µA : 1100 6.0 µA 1010 5.0 µA : 0110 3.0 µA : 0100 2.0 µA : 0010 1.0 µA

0001 0.5 µA 0000 0.0 µA

When Switch 7 is “1”, it means “ - ”. For example,“10000100” means “-2.0 µA”.

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0

Adjustment targets

Size Type Plain paper (front) Plain paper (back) Thick paper Emvelops

148 mm or smallerMachin parameter

860

Machin parameter

865

Machin parameter

870

Machin parameter

875149 ~ 182 mm 861 866 871 876

183 ~ 216 mm 862 867 872 877

217 ~ 257 mm 863 868 873 878

258 ~ 297 mm 864 869 874 879

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-60


SwitchInitial






3 0 Copy print density Switch 3210

1001 Darkest setting:

0111:

0101 Initial setting:

0011:

0001 Lightest setting0000 Invalid

2 0

1 0

0 0


SwitchInitial






3 0 Fax received documents printdensity


:0111

:0101 Initial setting:

0011:


2 0

1 0

0 0


SwitchInitial

Setting






3 0 PC printout print density Switch 32101001 Darkest setting

:0111


:0011

:0001 Lightest setting0000 Invalid

2 0

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-61


SwitchInitial






3 0 List printout print density Switch 3210

1001 Darkest setting:

0111:

0101 Initial setting:

0011:


2 0

1 0

0 0



SwitchInitial


7 0 Fusing temperatureTransparency Sheet

Switch 76 11 185 ˚C 10 180 ˚C 01 175 ˚C 00 170 ˚C

6 0

5 0 Fusing temperatureEnvelop

Switch 543 /210 011 215 ˚C 010 210 ˚C 001 205 ˚C 000 200 ˚C Initial setting 101 195 ˚C 110 190 ˚C 111 185 ˚C

4 0

3 0

2 0 Fusing temperaturePostcard1 0

0 0


SwitchInitial







2 0 Fusing temperaturePlain paper

Switch 210 011 195 ˚C 010 190 ˚C 001 185 ˚C

000 180 ˚C

Initial setting 101 175 ˚C 110 170 ˚C 111 165 ˚C

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-62

3.3 Memory Switch Adjustment

3.3.1 Setting the Memory SwitchesThese switches are used to program internal machine parameters. The primary back up batterymaintains these settings if power are lost.


2. Select “Mem Switch Edit” and press [Enter].


4. Press [Enter].

5. To navigate through the memory switch settings:


• Press or of the cursor key to move the cursor.

• Press <0> or <1> on the numeric keypad, or or , to change the bit value.

• Press [Enter] save the setting of the displayed memory switch and return to the memoryswitch edit screen.

• Press [Cancel] not to save the setting of the displayed memory switch.

6. If you want to set other memory switches, repeat step 3-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7.


Note: You can confirm the initial setting of each Memory Switch by the Memory Switches List.

The memory switch List will be printed by pressing <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <0> and [Yes].

3.3.2 Clearing the Memory SwitchesResets the memory switches to factory defaults.


2. Select “Mem Switch Clear” and press [Enter].

3. Press [Yes]. The memory switches will reset to factory defaults.

Note: To finish the operation without clearing the switches, press [No].[No]..


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-63

Memory Switch 000 - Dialer

SwitchInitial




5 0 CED detection condition Sets whether the detection should be strict or not.

Normal Strict

350ms 500ms 700ms 1000msSwitch 5 0 0 1 1

4 0 1 0 1

4 0

3 0 DIS detect time after dialing0: 55 sec1: 70 sec

Sets the time DIS signal is detected after dialing anumber.

2 1 CED detection0: No1: Yes

Can be use to ignore CED detection if noise onthe telephone line is mistaken as a 2100 Hz CEDsignal.

1 1 Dial tone detection0: Do not dial1: Dial

Determines if the machine proceeds with dialing orindicates an error if no dial tone is detected withinfive seconds of going off-hook.

0 0 Phone line type for the firstphone line0: PSTN1: PBX

When set to PSTN, the machine checks for dialtone and acts according to the setting of memoryswitch 000, bit 1. When set to PBX, the machine00, bit 1. When set to PBX, the machine0, bit 1. When set to PBX, the machinealways dials a given number of seconds after goingoff-hook. Memory switch 001 sets the number ofseconds.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-64

Memory Switch 001 --- Dialer

SwitchInitial




5 0 DIS detection condition Sets whether the detection should be strict or not.

Normal Strict

200ms 300ms 400ms 500msSwitch 5 0 0 1 1

4 0 1 0 1

4 0

3 0 PBX mode dial pause Sets the number of seconds the machine waitsbefore dialing when memory switch 000, bit 0 is set0, bit 0 is set, bit 0 is setto PBX mode.

Switch 3 2 1 0 Pause time0 0 0 0 0 sec0 0 0 1 1 sec0 0 1 0 2 sec0 0 1 1 3 sec

0 1 0 0 4 sec Initial setting0 1 0 1 5 sec0 1 1 0 6 sec0 1 1 1 7 sec1 0 0 0 8 sec1 0 0 1 9 sec1 0 1 0 10 sec1 0 1 1 11 sec1 1 0 0 12 sec1 1 0 1 13 sec1 1 1 0 14 sec1 1 1 1 15 sec

2 1

1 0

0 0


SwitchInitial









0 0Redial in D.0.7 error0: Yes1: No

When set to “1”, the machine does not redial in D.0.7error (Incoming detection time over).

Memory Switch 003 --- Factory use only

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-65


SwitchInitial






3 0 DTMF attenuation See table below

2 1 Note: The setting of this switch is available only

1 1 when setting other than 0.

0 1

Memory Switch 004…DTMF attenuation

Switch -15

dB

-14

dB

-13

dB

-12

dB

-11

dB

-10

dB

-9

dB

-8

dB

-7

dB

-6

dB

-5

dB

-4

dB

-3

dB

-2

dB

-1

dB

-0

dB

3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0


SwitchInitial



6 1 Ring signal detect time Set the time that an incoming ring will not be detectedafter hanging up. (Fax/Tel Ready mode only.) Switch 6 5 4

0 0 0 100 ms0 0 1 200 ms

0 1 0 300 ms0 1 1 400 ms1 0 0 500 ms1 0 1 600 ms1 1 0 700 ms1 1 1 800 ms

5 1

4 0

3 0 Number of CI signal detectiondetectionin Fax/Tel Ready mode

0: Detect 1 timeDetect 1 time1 timetime1: Detect 2 timesDetect 2 times2 timestimes

Select the number of detection time of CI signal inlect the number of detection time of CI signal inthe number of detection time of CI signal indetection time of CI signal inCI signal inthe Fax/Tel Ready mode or in the ringer silent mode.in the ringer silent mode.ringer silent mode.ilent mode..Incoming calls are answered according to this settingregardless of the number of rings chosen in the UserSettings.

2 0 Dual ring detection0: No

1: Yes

When enabled, the machine is able to auto answeran incoming ring with an off time of 120 - 60 ms.

1 0 Long ring detection0: No1: Yes

Allows the machine to respond to an incoming ringif the ring on time is longer than two seconds.

0 1 Frequency of the CI signalrequency of the CI signalof the CI signaldetection0: No1: Yes

When disabled, the unit will not check the frequency ofofthe incoming CI signal.

Memory Switch 006 ~ 009 --- Factory use only

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-66

Memory Switch 010 --- Transmission

SwitchInitial


7 1 Busy tone detection0: No1: Yes

Set this switch to “0” if the ring tone of remote unit ismistaken for a busy signal.

6 0 Fallback pattern (bps) 2400 4800 7200 9600 12000 14400

Set at 0: 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 timesSet at 1: 4 times 1 times 1 times 1 times 1 times 1 times

5 0 Overseas mode0: No1: Yes

Re-enables echo suppression that is disabled bythe CED signal (2100 Hz). Also ignores the first DISsignal and transmits the DCS signal in response tothe second DIS signal.

4 0 V.29 Echo Protect tone0: No1: Yes

International telephone lines equipped with echosuppression will cut the beginning portion of thetransmitted information which may cause thereceiver not to receive the training and data. Toprotect the received image from degrading, a 0.5second Echo Protect tone is placed prior to thetraining using G3 high-speed modem training

(V.29).3 1 Maximum transmit speed (kbps)

2.4 4.8 7.2 9.6 12 14.4 16.8 19.2 21.6 24 26.4 28.8 31.2 33.6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

2 1

1 0

0 1

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-67


SwitchInitial


7 0 The time between reception of CFR and transmission of data

When CFR and data overlap due to line echo, increase the interval between CFRand data transmission using this switch.

6 1

250 ms 500 ms 750 ms 1000 msSwitch 7 0 0 1 1Switch 6 0 1 0 1

5 0 Interval between DCS and TCF

When FTT is received after DCS and TCF signals due to line echo, increase theinterval between DCS and TCF signals using this switch.

4 0 75 ms 300 ms 450 ms 600 msSwitch 5 0 0 1 1Switch 4 0 1 0 1

3 1

2 0 Output attenuation See table below

1 0

0 1

Memory Switch 011…Output attenuation

Switch -15

dB

-14

dB

-13

dB

-12

dB

-11

dB

-10

dB

-9

dB

-8

dB

-7

dB

-6

dB

-5

dB

-4

dB

-3

dB

-2

dB

-1

dB

-0

dB

3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-68


SwitchInitial




5 0 Changing the date format ofthe transmitted TTI0: No

1: Yes

When set to “1”, the machine changes the dateformat of the transmitted TTI from MM:DD:YY, orvice versa.

4 1 TTI transmit0: No1: Yes

(Note: Turning TTItransmission off may violatelocal or federal regulations.)

When set at “0”, transmission of the TTI is disabled.The TTI includes the followings:• Sender name• Sender’s fax number’s fax numbers fax number• Data & time, and number of pagesTo set the individually transmission of them, seeindividually transmission of them, seetransmission of them, seeMemory SW 016.

3 0 ECM response time0: 3 sec1: 4.8 sec

The time limit to receive the response signal for theECM post message.

2 0 ECM error retransmit time0: 200 ms1: 400 ms

The time limit before the ECM error is retransmitted.

1 0 Interval between DIS and DCS



SwitchInitial


7 0 ANSam detection

0: Yes1: No

During the V8 handshake, if some noise disturbs

the handshake and an error occurs, set to “1”.

6 0 V.34 transmission0: Yes1: No

Individual setting for V.34 transmission.

5 0 CSI/TSI/CIG transmit0: Yes1: No

When set at “1”, transmission of the CSI, TSI andCIG signals are disabled.

4 0 ECM mode0: On1: Off

Determines ECM mode. ECM mode reducesdocument memory and may lengthen transmissionand reception times.

3 0 Retransmit automatically

when receiving RTN/PINsignals0: Yes1: No

When set to “1”, retransmission disables

automatically if receiving RTN/PIN signals.





7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-69


SwitchInitial


7 0 Program individual autodialerattributes0: No1: Yes

Allows individual setting of memory switches 010 asattribute 1, 011 as attribute 2, 012 as attribute 3 and013 as attribute 4 when fax or e-mail destinatilnsare registered in the address book. (Refer to page3-84 for settings.)




2 0 Sending RTC signal whentransmission is canceled0: Yes1: No

RTC signal is sent at the end of the transmission.When set at “0”, the machine will send the RTC ifthe transmission is canceled. No error will occur.When set at “1”, an error will occur becauseRTC will not be sent at the end of a canceledtransmission.

1 1 Cancel redial if T.4.1 or T.4.4error occurs0: Yes1: No

When set at “0”, if a T.4.1 or T.4.4 error occurs, themachine will not retry the transmission.

0 1 Action after EOR signal0: Continue1: Discontinue

Sets action after receiving PPR four times at 2400bps.


SwitchInitial






3 1 Additional data on TTItransmit0: No1: Yes

When set at “0”, the transmission of the additionaldata (time, the number of pages, file number, etc)is disabled.Note: This switch is available only when Memoryswitch 012, bit 4 and/or Memory switch 013, bit 5 isavailable.

2 1 Subscriber ID transmit0: No1: Yes

When set at “0”, the transmission of the subscriberID is disabled.Note: This switch is available only when Memoryswitch 012, bit 4 and/or Memory switch 013, bit 5 isavailable.

1 1 TTI (name) transmit0: No1: Yes

When set at “0”, the transmission of the name thatis stored in the unit is disabled.Note: This switch is available only when Memoryswitch 012, bit 4 and/or Memory switch 013, bit 5 isavailable.


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-70


SwitchInitial









0 0 Check only manually enteredfax numbers in ID checktransmission0: No1: Yes

When set at “1”, the ID check transmission willcheck only the manually entered fax numbers andnot check the numbers entered using the addressbook.


Memory Switch 020 --- Reception

SwitchInitial


7 0 Data error rate0: 10%1: 20%

Determines the allowable number of erred lines outof total lines received in a document.

6 0 Pause one second aftersending CED0: No (75 ms)1: Yes (1 sec)

A 2100 Hz CED signal disables echo suppressionin some telephone equipment. When set to “1”, themachine pauses one second after sending CED,which allows echo suppression to restart. This mayhelp with problematic overseas reception.



3 1 Receive speed (kbps)Maximum receive speed may be slowed to compensate for poor phone lines.2.4 4.8 7.2 9.6 12 14.4 16.8 19.2 21.6 24 26.4 28.8 31.2 33.6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

2 1

1 0

0 1

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-71


SwitchInitial


7 0 Not used

6 0 DIS “inch” declaration0: No1: Yes


4 0 T1 timer0: 35 sec1: 20 sec

Adjusts the T1 time-out. After the machine dialsthe remote machine’s phone number, it beginssending CNG and waits this amount of time beforedisconnecting the line.

3 1 Print image data when postmessage is not received afterreceiving RTC signal0: No1: Yes

If the received document includes the RTC, themachine prints the data even though the followingprotocol is not succeeded.

2 0 DIS/DTC Extend fieldTransmit0: Yes1: No（Tx until Bit No.24 of

DIS/DTC）

Setting this switch to “1” will disable ITU-T superfineITU-T superfinesuperfinemode.

1 0 G3 echo receive

Adjusts the delay between detection of training/TCF and sending of CFR.


0 1



SwitchInitial



6 0 V.34 reception0: Yes1: No

Individual setting for V.34 reception.




2 0 Calling period in Fax/Telreception mode

Defines the callign period in Fax/Tel reception mode Switch 2 1 0

0 0 0 30 seconds Inital setting0 0 1 40 seconds0 1 0 50 seconds0 1 1 60 seconds1 0 0 90 seconds1 0 1 120 seconds1 1 0 180 seconds1 1 1 300 seconds

1 0

0 0


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-72

Memory Switch 030 --- Modem

SwitchInitial


7 0 Number of HDLC end flags Defines the number of HDLC end flags.

Switch 7 6 5 40 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 2

0 0 1 0 3 Initial setting0 0 1 1 40 1 0 0 50 1 0 1 60 1 1 0 70 1 1 1 81 0 0 0 91 0 0 1 101 0 1 0 111 0 1 1 121 1 0 0 131 1 0 1 141 1 1 0 15

1 1 1 1 16

6 0

5 1

4 0



1 0 Digital cable equalizer0: Free1: Hold

When set to “1”, become efficient for the line shortbreak, but become weak for the line noise. It’s available only for communication at 14,400 or12,000 bit/s.

0 0 No use


SwitchInitial


7 0 EYE-Q check level at7200 bps

0 0 1 1Strict-- - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient 0 1 0 1

6 1


0 0 1 1Strict - - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient 0 1 0 1

4 1


0 0 1 1Strict - - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient 0 1 0 1

2 1


0 0 1 1Strict - - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient 0 1 0 1

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-73


SwitchInitial


7 1 EYE-Q slice level0: Disable1: Enable

Setting this bit to “1” enables memory switch 032,bits 0-3 and memory switch 031, bits 0-7 andenables EYE-Q check adjustment.

6 1 Check EYE-Q0: No

1: Yes

Set at 0: Line condition status (EYE-Q) is notchecked after checking TCF.

Set at 1: Line condition status (EYE-Q) is checkedafter checking TCF.




0 0 1 1Strict - - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient 0 1 0 1

2 0


0 0 1 1Strict - - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient 0 1 0 1

0 0


SwitchInitial








1 0 Delete receive echo of CFRat the receiver side0: No

1: Yes

Modem will be opened only in high-speed mode.Sets this switch to “1” to resolve the problem causedof the echo of CFR.

0 0 Expand FSK receive timeafter detecting flag0: 3.3 seconds1: 10 seconds

Setting this switch to “1” extend HDLC frame receivetimer in FSK from 3.3 seconds to 10 seconds afterdetecting pre-amble.


Memory Switch 040 --- Scanner

SwitchInitial








0 1 Document TX length limit0: 3.6 meters1: 1 meter

Setting to unlimited will override document jamsensing.



7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-74

Memory Switch 052 --- Printer

SwitchInitial




5 0 Attach sender’s informationsign on the journal0: No

1: Yes

If this setting is activated, a sign that indicates thatthe sender’s name printed on the journal is a re-ceived information.

4 0 Name priority on the journal This sets the priority of the name printed on the journal.

See table below.3 0

2 1

1 0

0 1

Bit 43210 First priority Second priority Third priority Forth priority

00000 Name on address book Dialed fax number TTI Subscriber ID

00001 Subscriber ID TTI Dialed fax number Name on address book

00010 Name on address book Dialed fax number Subscriber ID TTI

00011 Name on address book TTI Dialed fax number Subscriber ID

00100 Name on address book TTI Subscriber ID Dialed fax number00101 Name on address book Subscriber ID Dialed fax number TTI

00110 Name on address book Subscriber ID TTI Dialed fax number

00111 Dialed fax number Name on address book TTI Subscriber ID

01000 Dialed fax number Name on address book Subscriber ID TTI

01001 Dialed fax number TTI Name on address book Subscriber ID

01010 Dialed fax number TTI Subscriber ID Name on address book

01011 Dialed fax number Subscriber ID Name on address book TTI

01100 Dialed fax number Subscriber ID TTI Name on address book

01101 TTI Name on address book Dialed fax number Subscriber ID

01110 TTI Name on address book Subscriber ID Dialed fax number

01111 TTI Dialed fax number Name on address book Subscriber ID

10000 TTI Dialed fax number Subscriber ID Name on address book

10001 TTI Subscriber ID Name on address book Dialed fax number

10010 TTI Subscriber ID Dialed fax number Name on address book10011 Subscriber ID Name on address book Dialed fax number TTI

10100 Subscriber ID Name on address book TTI Dialed fax number

10101 Subscriber ID Dialed fax number Name on address book TTI

10110 Subscriber ID Dialed fax number TTI Name on address book

10111 Subscriber ID TTI Name on address book Dialed fax number

11000 Subscriber ID TTI Dialed fax number Name on address book


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-75

Memory Switch 060 --- Remote reception

SwitchInitial



6 1 CML relay off time afterdialing0: 1 sec1: 200 ms

When dialing from the keypad, phone line noisemay occur as the CML relay switches on and off.Set this switch to “0” to avoid this.

5 0 DTMF tones heard throughhandset0: No1: Yes

Determines if DTMF tones are produced throughthe handset in off-hook dialing.






Memory Switch 061 --- Remote receptionSwitch

InitialSetting






3 0 Off-hook / on-hook detecttime

Sets the time interval between the on-hook and off-hook (or off-hook/on-hook) condition. Switch 3 2 1 0 Time

0 0 0 0 0 ms0 0 0 1 100 ms

0 0 1 0 200 ms0 0 1 1 300 ms0 1 0 0 400 ms Initial setting0 1 0 1 500 ms0 1 1 0 600 ms0 1 1 1 700 ms1 0 0 0 800 ms1 0 0 1 900 ms1 0 1 0 1000 ms1 0 1 1 1100 ms1 1 0 0 1200 ms1 1 0 1 1300 ms1 1 1 0 1400 ms

1 1 1 1 1500 ms

2 1

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-76


SwitchInitial





4 1 CNG detect in Ans/Fax ready0: No

1: Yes

When set to “1”, the machine detects the CNGsignal in Ans/Fax ready.

3 0 Switch-hook time If the switch hook is quickly depressed andreleased, switch-to-fax will occur. This settingadjusts how quickly the switch hook activation mustbe. Switch 3 2 1 0 Time

0 0 0 0 0 ms0 0 0 1 100 ms0 0 1 0 200 ms0 0 1 1 300 ms Initial setting0 1 0 0 400 ms0 1 0 1 500 ms0 1 1 0 600 ms

0 1 1 1 700 ms1 0 0 0 800 ms1 0 0 1 900 ms1 0 1 0 1000 ms1 0 1 1 1100 ms1 1 0 0 1200 ms1 1 0 1 1300 ms1 1 1 0 1400 ms1 1 1 1 1500 ms

2 0

1 1

0 1


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-77

Memory Switch 064 --- Remote reception and TAD interface

SwitchInitial


7 0 CNG detect period after TADbegins recording ICM

Sets the period during which CNG is detected afterthe TAD begins recording incoming message. Switch 7 6 5 4 Time

0 0 0 0 0 sec0 0 0 1 10 sec

6 0 0 0 1 0 20 sec0 0 1 1 30 sec Initial setting0 1 0 0 40 sec0 1 0 1 50 sec0 1 1 0 60 sec

5 1 0 1 1 1 70 sec1 0 0 0 80 sec1 0 0 1 90 sec1 0 1 0 100 sec1 0 1 1 110 sec

4 1 1 1 0 0 120 sec1 1 0 1 130 sec1 1 1 0 140 sec

1 1 1 1 150 sec

3 0 CNG detect period after TADanswers

Sets the period during which CNG is detected afterthe TAD answers an incoming call. Switch 3 2 1 0 Time

0 0 0 0 0 sec0 0 0 1 10 sec Initial setting



0 1 1 1 0 0 120 sec1 1 0 1 130 sec1 1 1 0 140 sec1 1 1 1 150 sec

Incoming rings

CNG detection is active CNG detection is active

TAD plays Outgoing message TAD records Incoming message

(Adjusted by Memory switch 64, bit 0-3) (Adjusted by Memory switch 64, bit 4-7)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-78


SwitchInitial


7 0 Adjustment of CI detect time Sets the time added to or reduced from the CIdetect time.

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 Time1 1 1 1 1 150 msec

1 1 1 0 1 140 msec : :0 1 0 0 1 40 msec0 0 1 1 1 30 msec0 0 1 0 1 20 msec0 0 0 1 1 10 msec0 0 0 0 0 0 msec Initial setting0 0 0 1 0 -10 msec0 0 1 0 0 -20 msec0 0 1 1 0 -30 msec0 1 0 0 0 -40 msec : :1 1 1 0 0 -140 msec

1 1 1 1 0 -150 msec

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0



0 0 Beep if fax handset hang up0: Yes1: No

Determines if your machine beeps when having leftthe fax’s handset hanging up after communication.


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-79

Memory Switch 070 - Operation

SwitchInitial


7 0 Display error line0: No1: Yes

The number of error lines contained in the receiveddata will be shown in the LCD.

6 0 Tonal line monitor0: No

1: Yes

Allows fax communication to be heard through themonitor speaker.


4 0 Sort autodialer printout0: Sort by autodialer location1: Sort by location ID

Specifies how entries on autodialer printouts aresorted.

3 1 Print check message if poweris lost0: No1: Yes

In the event of two power losses in a 40-hourperiod, documents will be lost. When power isrestored, a check message will print.

2 1 Print page if error occursduring memory transmission0: No1: Yes

For easy identification, the first page of a documentstored for memory transmission will print along acheck message if an error occurs during memorytransmission.

1 1 Print check message0: No1: Yes

To notify the user of an error, a check message canbe printed if a communication error occurs.


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-80

Memory Switch 071 --- Operation

SwitchInitial




5 1 Print TCR with the originalpage during memorytransmission when the result

is NG0: No1: Yes

For easy identification, the first page of a documentstored for memory transmission will print along aTCR when the transmission result is NG.


3 1 Print TCR with the originalpage during memorytransmission when the resultis OK0: No1: Yes

For easy identification, the first page of a documentstored for memory transmission will print along aTCR when the transmission result is OK.



0 0 Display modem speed0: No1: Yes

The transmit/receive speed is displayed in the LCD.

Memory switch071 … Print TCR with the original page

Switch 3 0 1

Switch 5 0 1 0 1

When Memory transmission was OK, … No No Yes Yes

When Memory transmission was NG, … No Yes No Yes

When all broadcast transmissions were OK, … No No Yes Yes

When some broadcast transmissions were NG, … No Yes No Yes


SwitchInitial








1 1 Erase polled document0: No1: Yes

Determines if a document stored for polling iserased after being polled.



7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-81


SwitchInitial







2 1 Security functions0: Disable1: Enable




7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-82

Memory Switch 097 --- Other functions

SwitchInitial


7 0 Day light saving time(Summer time) start month

This switch sets the month when the day light sav-ing time (summer time) begins.

Switch 7 6 5 4 Time

0 0 0 0 March

0 0 0 1 January

0 0 1 0 February

0 0 1 1 March Initial setting

0 1 0 0 April

0 1 0 1 May

0 1 1 0 June

0 1 1 1 July

1 0 0 0 August

1 0 0 1 September

1 0 1 0 October

1 0 1 1 November

1 0 1 1 December

6 0

5 1

4 1

3 0 Day light saving time(Summer time) start week

This switch sets the month when the day light sav-ing time (summer time) begins.

Switch 3 2 1 0 Time

0 0 0 0 Sunday 1:00 of the last week

0 0 0 1 Sunday 1:00 of the first week

0 0 1 0 Sunday 1:00 of the second week

0 0 1 1 Sunday 1:00 of the third week

0 1 0 0 Sunday 1:00 of the fourth week

0 1 0 1 Sunday 1:00 of the last week ofthe month Initial setting

2 1

1 0

0 1

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-83

Memory Switch 098 --- Other functions

SwitchInitial


7 1 Day light saving time(Summer time) end month

This switch sets the month when the day light sav-ing time (summer time) ends.

Switch 7 6 5 4 Time

0 0 0 0 October

0 0 0 1 January

0 0 1 0 February

0 0 1 1 March

0 1 0 0 April

0 1 0 1 May

0 1 1 0 June

0 1 1 1 July

1 0 0 0 August

1 0 0 1 September

1 0 1 0 October Initial setting

1 0 1 1 November

1 0 1 1 December

6 0

5 1

4 0

3 0 Day light saving time(Summer time) end week

This switch sets the month when the day light sav-ing time (summer time) ends.

Switch 3 2 1 0 Time

0 0 0 0 Sunday 1:00 of the last week

0 0 0 1 Sunday 1:00 of the first week

0 0 1 0 Sunday 1:00 of the second week

0 0 1 1 Sunday 1:00 of the third week

0 1 0 0 Sunday 1:00 of the fourth week

0 1 0 1 Sunday 1:00 of the last week ofthe month Initial setting

2 1

1 0

0 1


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-84

3.4 Setting Individual Autodialer AttributesThis function allows the user to configure an individual address book entry with the settings shown inMemory Switches 010, 011, 012 and 013.

To set the individual attributes:

1. Change memory switch 015, bit 7 to “1”. (See setting 3.3.1 Setting the Memory Switches for moreinformation on changing memory switch 015.)

2. When the function is enabled, an “Attribute” option is added to the speed dial registration steps. Theextra steps showing Attribute 1, Attribute 2, Attribute 3, and Attribute 4 are added as the last step.

3. Set the individual bit positions as shown in the following table.To change a setting, select the attribute to edit, press [Edit] and press or until the cursor is be-low the desired bit position; then press “1” or “0” to make the change.

4. Press [Enter] to save the setting of the displayed attribute and advance to the next attribute.

5. To set the other attribute, repeat steps 3 and 4.

6. Press [Close] to close the speed dial registration.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-85

Attribute 1 - Individual Autodialer Setting (Equivalent to Memory Switch 010)

SwitchInitial


7 1 Busy tone detection0: No1: Yes

Sets this switch to “0” if the ring tone of remote unitis mistaken for a busy signal.

6 0 Fallback pattern (bps) 2400 4800 7200 9600 14400

Set at 0: 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 timesSet at 1: 4 times 1 times 1 times 1 times 1 times

5 0 Overseas mode0: No1: Yes

Re-enables echo suppression that is disabled bythe CED signal (2100 Hz). Also ignores the first DISsignal and transmits the DCS signal in response tothe second DIS signal.

4 0 V.29 Echo Protect tone0: No1: Yes

International telephone lines equipped with echosuppression will cut the beginning portion of thetransmitted information which may cause thereceiver not to receive the training and data. Toprotect the received image from degrading, a 0.5second Echo Protect tone is placed prior to thetraining using G3 high-speed modem training(V.29).

3 1 Maximum transmit speed (kbps) 2.4 4.8 7.2 9.6 12 14.4 16.8 19.2 21.6 24 26.4 28.8 31.2 33.6

2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1

1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

0 1

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-86


SwitchInitial


7 0 The time between reception of CFR and transmission of data

When CFR and data overlap due to line echo, increase the interval between CFRand data transmission using this switch.

6 1


5 0 Interval between DCS and TCF

When FTT is received after DCS and TCF signals due to line echo, increase theinterval between DCS and TCF signals using this switch.


3 1

2 0 Output attenuation See table below.table below..1 0

0 1

Output attenuation when individual autodialer attributes are set.

Switch -15

dB

-14

dB

-13

dB

-12

dB

-11

dB

-10

dB

-9

dB

-8

dB

-7

dB

-6

dB

-5

dB

-4

dB

-3

dB

-2

dB

-1

dB

-0

dB

3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-87


SwitchInitial




5 0 Changing the date format ofthe transmitted TTI0: No

1: Yes

When set to “1”, the machine changes the dateformat of the transmitted TTI from MM: DD: YY, orvice versa.

4 1 TTI transmit0: No1: Yes

(Note: Turning TTItransmission off may violatelocal or federal regulations.)

When set at “0”, transmission of the TTI is disabled.The TTI includes the followings:• Sender name• Sender’s fax number’s fax numbers fax number• Data & time, and number of pagesTo set the individually transmission of them, seeindividually transmission of them, seetransmission of them, seeMemory SW 016.

3 0 ECM response time0: 3 sec1: 4.8 sec

The time limit to receive the response signal for theECM post message.

2 0 ECM error retransmit time

0: 200 ms1: 400 ms

The time limit before the ECM error is retransmitted.

1 0 Interval between DIS and DCS



SwitchInitial


7 0 ANSam detection0: Yes1: No

During the V8 handshake, if some noise disturbsthe handshake and an error occurs, set to “1”.

6 0 V.34 transmission0: Yes1: No

Individual setting for V.34 transmission.


4 0 ECM mode0: On1: Off

Determines ECM mode. ECM mode reducesdocument memory and may lengthen transmissionand reception times.

3 0 Retransmit automatically

when receiving RTN/PINsignals0: Yes1: No

When set to “1”, retransmission disables

automatically if receiving RTN/PIN signals.




7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-88

3.5 Unique Switch Adjustment

3.5.1 Setting the Unique SwitchesThese switches are used to program internal machine parameters. The primary back up batterymaintains these settings if power is lost.


2. Select “Switch Edit” and press [Enter].


4. Press [Enter].

5. To navigate through the unique switch settings:


• Press or of the cursor key to move the cursor.• Press <0> or <1> on the numeric keypad, or or , to change the bit value.

• Press [Enter] to save the setting of the displayed unique switch and return to the uniqueswitch edit screen.

• Press [Cancel] not to save the setting of the displayed unique switch.

6. If you want to set other unique switches, repeat step 3-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7.


3.5.2 Clearing the Unique SwitchesResets the unique switches to factory defaults.


2. Select “Switch Clear” and press [Enter].

3. Press [Yes]. The unique switches will reset to factory defaults.

Note: To finish the operation without clearing the switches, press [No].

4. Press <Reset> o return the machine to standby.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-89

Unique Switch 000 — Dialer

SwitchInitial



6 0 Congestion tone detection0: No1: Yes

Setting this switch to “0” ignores telephone linecongestion tones.

5 1 Ring back tone wait time

(seconds) 3.0 3.3 3.6 3.9

Sets the time until the ring back tone begins after

answering an incoming call in the Fax/Tel Ready orTel/Fax Ready mode.

4 1 Switch 5: 0 0 1 1Switch 4: 0 1 0 1






SwitchInitial






3 1 Enable the 1st tone key0: No1: Yes

2 1 Enable the 2nd tone key0: No1: Yes

1 1 Enable the dial prefix key

0: No1: Yes


Unique Switch 002 --- Factory use only


SwitchInitial






3 0 The period before detectingbusytone after dialing

Switch 3 2 1 0 Time1 1 1 1 1500 ms1 1 1 0 1400 ms 1 0 0 0 800 ms0 1 1 1 700 ms0 1 1 0 600 ms0 1 0 1 500 ms0 1 0 0 400 ms (Initial setting)

0 0 1 1 300 ms0 0 1 0 200 ms0 0 0 1 100 ms0 0 0 0 0 ms

2 0

1 0

0 0

Unique Switch 004 ~ 009 --- Factory use only

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-90

Unique Switch 010 — Transmission

SwitchInitial




5 1 TTI reduction in normal mode0: No1: Yes

Determine wheter to transmit the TTI informationreduceted 50% in vertical direction.

4 0 TTI reduction in fine andsuperfine mode0: No1: Yes

Determine wheter to transmit the TTI informationreduceted 50% in vertical direction.

3 1 Including TTI inside thedocument0: No1: Yes

Setting this switch to “0” transmit the documentlength added with the TTI. Setting it to “1” transmitthe length including TTI inside the document.However in this case, the image at the top of thedocument might be overlapped with TTI.(TTI length: 4.2mm)


1 1 The number of times PPR is detected during ECM transmission 1 time 2 times 3 times 4 times

0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-91


SwitchInitial



6 0

Send result to the sender inrelayed reception0: No1: Yes

Note: This setting takes effect only when UniqueSwitch 016 -2 is set to “1”.

Determine whether to send the result of receptionto the sender in relayed reception and F-code relay

reception5 0 Not used





0 1 V.8 handshake in real timeTx0: No1: Yes

Determine whether the to do handshaking with V.8recommendation if real time transmission.


SwitchInitial


7 1 Available *, # and spaceupon F-code box registration0: No1: Yes

Determines if the * (asterisk), # (sharp) and spaceare available upon F-code box registration.

6 1

Available *, # and spaceupon F-code communicating0: No1: Yes

Determines if the * (asterisk), # (sharp) and spaceare available upon F-code communicating.

5 0 Ignore space in F-code ID0: Yes1: No

Determines if checking the space stored in theF-code ID.

4 1 F-code sub-frame off0: Send1: Not send

Do not send the sub-address and password ofF-code box when a point of sending DCS signalafter EOM signal.

3 0 Send F-code box’s TTI0: No1: Yes

Transmit the sub-address and box name of F-codebox with F-code polling document.

2 0 Send not-delivered-report tothe sender machine0: No1: Yes

If this switch is activated, the machine send thenot-delivered-report to the sender machine at relaytransmission.

If Unique Switch 015-6 is also activated, the ma-

chine sends the result report instead of the non-delivered-report.

1 0 Retrieve document0: No1: Yes

Retrieve the document received in F-codeSecureMail box by polling transmission.

0 1 Ignore F-code bit0: No1: Yes

Neglect SEP bit of DTC signal or SUB bit of DCSsignal at F-code polled transmission.

Note: The “F-code communication” is possible the SecureMail and Polling operation using the F-code(SUB/SEP/PWD/SID). However, it is not based on T.33 recommendation.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-92


SwitchInitial








1 1 JBIG transmission0: No1: Yes

Determines if the JBIG transmission is available.


Unique Switch 018 --- Transmission

SwitchInitial





4 0 Disconnect the line whenthe transmission speed fallsdown under 7200 bps0: No1: Yes

Determine if the machine disconnect the phone linewhen the transmission speed fall down under 7200bps.

3 0 Disconnect the line whenthe transmission speed fallsdown under 4800 bps0: No1: Yes

Determine if the machine disconnect the phone linewhen the transmission speed fall down under 4800bps.

2 0 Not used1 0 Not used

0 0 Transmission when disable todetect first NSF in real timetransmission.0: Retry to detect NSF1: Transmit with the standard

protocol

Determines the action when disable to detect firstNSF in real time transmission.


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-93

Unique Switch 020 — Reception

SwitchInitial




5 0 No use

4 1 Transmit CED signal0: No

1: Yes

Determines if sending CED signal.

3 1 Pseudo-ring start time(seconds) 5 6 8 10

Sets the time the pseudo-ring begins afteranswering an incoming call.(Fax/Tel Ready or Tel/Fax Ready mode only.)

2 0 Switch 3: 0 0 1 1Switch 2: 0 1 0 1

1 1 Printout the pages completedto receive during receivinginto memory0: No1: Yes

Determines if whether to printout the page whichdata is completed to receive during receiving it intofax’s memory.

0 1 Factoriy use only


SwitchInitial






3 1 TCF check time(in 100 ms units)

If the TCF time is such that poor image quality is theresult, lengthen the TCF check time.

Switch 3 2 1 0 Time2 0 0 0 0 0 0 ms0 0 0 1 100 ms0 0 1 0 200 ms0 0 1 1 300 ms0 1 0 0 400 ms0 1 0 1 500 ms

1 0 0 1 1 0 600 ms0 1 1 1 700 ms1 0 0 0 800 ms Initial setting1 0 0 1 900 ms1 0 1 0 1000 ms1 0 1 1 1100 ms

0 0 1 1 0 0 1200 ms1 1 0 1 1300 ms1 1 1 0 1400 ms1 1 1 1 1500 ms

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-94


SwitchInitial






3 1 JBIG reception

0: No1: Yes

Determines how documents from the remote fax are

received.

2 0 Receive the junk fax0: Yes1: No

When the block junk fax feature is set to Mode 2and the fax does not receive the TSI signal from theremote fax, determine if receiving the fax other thanthe remote fax number set to the block junk dial list.










3 0 Not used

2 1 Receiving fax in 600 dpi(S-fine)0: No: No1: Yes

Sets whether to receive fax in 600 dpi.




7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-95

Unique Switch 030 — Modem

SwitchInitial




5 1 3429 baud symbol rate whencommunicating at V.340: No

1: Yes

If the error frame often occurs because of thesymbol rate is too high, setting this switch to“1” mask that symbol rate and keep down the

occurrence of error frame.4 1 3200 baud symbol rate when

communicating at V.340: No1: Yes

3 1 3000 baud symbol rate whencommunicating at V.340: No1: Yes




See above (switch 5 to 2).

Unique Switch 031 — Factory use only

Unique Switch 032 — Modem

SwitchInitial








1 1 ANSam output time0: 3 sec1: 4 sec

The time limit to output the ANSam (A sinewavesignal at 2100 Hz amplitude-modulated). Sets to “1”when the V.8 handshake is hard to achieve.



7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-96

Unique Switch 040 — Scanner

SwitchInitial


7 0 Factiory use only







0 1 Resolution in “Photo” modetransmission0: Superfine1: Hyperfine

Superfine: 8x15.4dot/mmHyperfine: 16x15.4dot/mm


SwitchInitial


7 1 Set the fixed ratio for copyand the auto ratio in detail0: No1: Yes

When set to “1”, the ratio will be calculated in detailautomatically according to the document size andthe recording paper size.







0 1 Rotate and store in memory0: No

1: Yes

Note: This setting takes effect only when thetotate reception is activated.

Rotate an A4 and store it as A4 document inmemory.



SwitchInitial


7 0 Confirmation stamp stampingtime Adjustment

Adjust the time length to stamp.

Switch 7 6 5 Time

1 1 1 700 ms1 1 0 600 ms1 0 1 500 ms1 0 0 400 ms0 1 0 200 ms0 0 1 100 ms0 0 0 300 ms (Initial setting)

6 0

5 0

4 0 Scanner heater0: On1: Off

The optional scanner heater turns on / off.

3 0 Stop scanning by each page0: No

1: Yes

Turn this switch on, when document jam occursfrequently in time-consuming scanning such as

enlarge scanning.2 0 Factory use only



7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-97


SwitchInitial






3 0 Motor stopping period for

Confirmation stamp

This determines the period from ADF motor stop to

stamping the confirmation stamp. Switch 3 2 1 Settings

1 1 1 700 ms1 1 0 600 ms1 0 1 500 ms1 0 0 400 ms0 1 1 300 ms0 1 0 200 ms0 0 1 100 ms0 0 0 100 ms

2 0

1 0




SwitchInitial




5 0 Left side edge documentmargin adjustment

Each setting changes by

0.4233 mm.

Left side means the side ofthe scanning position.

Switch 5 4 3 2 1 0 Settings1 1 1 1 1 1 26.67 mm :1 1 1 1 0 0 25.40 mm

:1 1 0 0 1 0 21.17 mm :1 0 1 0 0 0 16.93 mm :0 1 1 1 1 0 12.70 mm :0 1 0 1 0 1 8.47 mm :0 0 0 1 0 1 4.23 mm :0 0 0 0 0 1 0.42 mm0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 mm

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 00 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-98


SwitchInitial




5 0 Right side edge documentmargin adjustment

Each setting changes by0.4233 mm.

Right side means theopposite side of the scanningposition.

Switch 5 4 3 2 1 0 Settings1 1 1 1 1 1 26.67 mm :

1 1 1 1 0 0 25.40 mm :1 1 0 0 1 0 21.17 mm :1 0 1 0 0 0 16.93 mm :0 1 1 1 1 0 12.70 mm :0 1 0 1 0 1 8.47 mm :0 0 0 1 0 1 4.23 mm :0 0 0 0 0 1 0.42 mm

0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 mm

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0


SwitchInitial




5 0 Leading edge documentmargin adjustment uponscanning using FBS..

Adjusts the leading edgemargin when scanningdocument by FBS.

Each setting changes by1 mm.

Switch 5 4 3 2 1 0 Settings0 0 0 0 0 0 0 mm0 0 0 0 0 1 1 mm0 0 0 0 1 0 2 mm

0 0 0 0 1 1 3 mm0 0 0 1 0 0 4 mm0 0 0 1 0 1 5 mm0 0 0 1 1 0 6 mm0 0 0 1 1 1 7 mm0 0 1 0 0 0 8 mm0 0 1 0 0 1 9 mm0 0 1 0 1 0 10 mm0 0 1 0 1 1 11 mm0 0 1 1 0 0 12 mm0 0 1 1 0 1 13 mm0 0 1 1 1 0 14 mm0 0 1 1 1 1 15 mm

0 1 0 0 0 0 16 mm0 1 0 0 0 1 17 mm0 1 0 0 1 0 18 mm0 1 0 0 1 1 19 mm0 1 0 1 0 0 20 mm0 1 0 1 0 1 21 mm0 1 0 1 1 0 22 mm0 1 0 1 1 1 23 mm0 1 1 0 0 0 24 mm0 1 1 0 0 1 25 mm :1 1 1 1 1 1 63 mm

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 00 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-99


SwitchInitial




5 0 Trailing edge documentmargin adjustment uponscanning using FBS

Adjusts the trailing edgemargin when scanningdocument by FBS.

Each setting changes by1 mm.

Switch 5 4 3 2 1 0 Settings0 0 0 0 0 0 0 mm0 0 0 0 0 1 1 mm

0 0 0 0 1 0 2 mm0 0 0 0 1 1 3 mm0 0 0 1 0 0 4 mm0 0 0 1 0 1 5 mm0 0 0 1 1 0 6 mm0 0 0 1 1 1 7 mm0 0 1 0 0 0 8 mm0 0 1 0 0 1 9 mm0 0 1 0 1 0 10 mm0 0 1 0 1 1 11 mm0 0 1 1 0 0 12 mm0 0 1 1 0 1 13 mm0 0 1 1 1 0 14 mm

0 0 1 1 1 1 15 mm0 1 0 0 0 0 16 mm0 1 0 0 0 1 17 mm0 1 0 0 1 0 18 mm0 1 0 0 1 1 19 mm0 1 0 1 0 0 20 mm0 1 0 1 0 1 21 mm0 1 0 1 1 0 22 mm0 1 0 1 1 1 23 mm0 1 1 0 0 0 24 mm0 1 1 0 0 1 25 mm : :

1 1 1 1 1 1 63 mm

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-100

Unique Switch 050 — Printer

SwitchInitial



6 0 Smoothing in list printing0: No1: Yes

Smoothes the data scanned in each resolutionmode.

5 1 Smoothing S-Fine mode

(200 x 400 dpi) mode Rotatereceiption0: No1: Yes

4 1 Smoothing in Normal modeRotate receiption0: No1: Yes

3 0 Smoothing in H-Fine (400 x400 dpi) mode0: No1: Yes

2 1 Smoothing in S-Fine (200 x400 dpi) mode0: No1: Yes

1 0 Smoothing in Fine mode0: No1: Yes

0 1 Smoothing in Normal mode0: No1: Yes











0 0 Reduce print0: No1: Yes

If the received fax is larger than the paper in thecassettes, setting this switch to “1” means thedocument will be printed on one page by reduction.


SwitchInitial









0 0 Printing margin adjustment0: Normal1: No margin

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-101


SwitchInitial


7 0 Printer density adjustment. Switch 76543210 Settings

00000000 Not available 00000001 Lightest 00000010 :

00000011 : 00000100

00000011 Normal Initial setting00000110 : 00001001 Darkest 00001011 Not available : ↓

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 1

0 1


Unique Switch 057 — Remote reception

SwitchInitial




5 0 Paper selection priority0: Less margin1: Same paper width

e.g. B5 size is received:“0” will print them on to A4 papers“1” will print them on to B4 papers





Unique Switch 058 — Remote reception

SwitchInitial


7 0 Printable pages after“Replace Toner” or “RelpaceDurm” appeared

Switch 76543210 Toner/Drum 11111111 255 / 2550 pages : 11001000 200 / 2000 pages : 10010110 150 / 1500 pages : 01100100 100 / 1000 pages : 00110010 50 / 500 pages : 00000001 1 / 10 page 00000000 0 page

6 1

5 1

4 0

3 0

2 1

1 0

0 0


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-102


Unique Switch 067 – Remote reception and TAD interface

SwitchInitial


7 0 Start detecting the busy tone

before pseudo-ring ringingstarts0: No1: Yes

6 1 Detect busy tone duringpseudo-ring ringing0: No1: Yes

5 0 No use

4 0 CNG detection during OGMoutput in ANS Ready0: Yes1: No

3 0 Number of detection DTMF Sets the number of detection the DTMF duringAns/Fax Ready mode.

Switch 3 2 1 0 Number of detection0 0 0 0 Not detect

2 0 0 0 0 1 10 0 1 0 20 0 1 1 3 Initial setting0 1 0 0 40 1 0 1 5

1 1 0 1 1 0 60 1 1 1 7

1 0 0 0 81 0 0 1 91 0 1 0 10

0 1 1 1 1 1 15


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-103

Unique Switch 069 – Remote reception

SwitchInitial


7 0 Fixing the service report faxnumber0: No (able to edit)1: Yes (unable to edit)

When set to “1”, the fax number entered in servicereport setting “Location 1” will be unable to edit bythe user.

7 0 The line voltage that TEL1

and TEL2 are regarded asoff-hooked.


1111111 127 volt : 1100100 100 volt : 1010000 80 volt : 1 10010 50 volt : 0011110 30 volt : 0010100 20 volt :

0001010 10 volt : 0000101 5 volt : 0000010 2 volt 0000001 1 volt 0000000 0 volt

6 05 1

4 0

3 1

2 0

1 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-104

Unique Switch 070 — Operation

SwitchInitial



6 1 LCD error message0: Remains in LCD1: Returns to standby

After an error message has printed, the setting ofthis switch determines if the error message willremain in the display.

5 1 Buzzer/keypad volume Switch OFF Low Medium Maximum

5 0 0 1 14 0 1 0 1

4 0


2 0 Standby mode priority0: Copy1: Fax






7 1 Line monitor in Quick memorytransmission0: Off1: On

6 0 Switch LCD language0: No1: Yes

If this switch is set to on, the LCD language isavailable to switch from Chinese to English andJapanese, by pressing <Menu> and <#>.




2 0 Factory use only1 0 Rx document to polling

document0: No1: Yes

Retrieve the document received in the memory bypolling transmission.


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-105


SwitchInitial







2 0 Send service report0: No1: Yes


0 0

Transmit consumable ordersheet0: No1: Yes

If this switch is set to “1”, the machine will transmitthe consumable order sheet automatically when thedrum cartridge is near end of its design life or thetoner cartridge is near empty.

Note: For this feature to work correctly, you mustregister several items. See “3.16 Consumableorder sheet” page 3-132.


SwitchInitial


7 0 Print consumable order sheet0: No1: Yes

If this switch is set to “1”, the machine will print theconsumable order sheet automatically when thedrum cartridge is near end of its design life or thetoner cartridge is near empty.

Note: For this feature to work correctly, you mustregister several items. See “3.16 Consumableorder sheet” page 3-132.








7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-106


SwitchInitial







2 1 Priority of consumable ordersheet printing

0: Print after the currentprinting job is completed

1: Print immediately

When the drum cartridge has reached its design life,or the toner cartridge is empty, the machine prints aconsumable order sheet.When this switch is set at “0”, the machine willnot print consumable order sheet until the currentprinting job is finished.

1 0 Print the transmission timeon TCR0: Print the transmit time1: Blank

When set to “0”, the transmission time will beprinted on TCR.

0 0 When receive a fax messageduring Auto power off mode,

the LCD will be in standbymode0: No1: Yes


SwitchInitial





3 1 Journal list printing order0: From old history1: From new history

2 0 Period to press the <EnergySave> to go to sleep mode

Switch 2 1 0 Time1 1 1 7 seconds1 1 0 6 seconds1 0 1 5 seconds1 0 0 4 seconds0 1 1 3 seconds0 1 0 2 seconds0 0 1 1 second

1 1

0 1


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-107


Unique Switch 084 – Miscellaneous

SwitchInitial


7 0 Does not send theconsumable order sheet in“toner near empty” condition.

The value set with this switch (printed pages) willbe compared with the value counted up in life moni-tor (printed pages after the toner is replaced). If thisvalue is larger than the value in life monitor whenthe machine goes to “toner near empty” condition,the installed toner is not considered as new tonerand the consumable order sheet will not be printed.

Switch 76543210 Settings 11111111 12750 pages : 01100100 5000 pages : 0110010 2500 pages :

00010100 1000 pages : 00001010 500 pages : 00000101 250 pages (initial setting) : 00000010 100 pages 00000001 50 pages 00000000 0

6 0

5 04 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0 0

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-108

Unique Switch 085 — Miscellaneous

SwitchInitial



6 0 Print/Send the consumableorder sheet when the drum isnear end0: Yes

1: No

Note: For this feature to work correctly, you mustto work correctly, you mustwork correctly, you mustregister several items. See “3.16 Consumable“3.16 Consumableorder sheet” page 3-132.page 3-132.3-132..

5 0 Print/Send the consumableorder sheet when toner isnear empty0: Yes1: No

Note: For this feature to work correctly, you mustto work correctly, you mustwork correctly, you mustregister several items. See “3.16 Consumable“3.16 Consumableorder sheet” page 3-132.page 3-132.3-132..

4 0 Print the receive time stampwithin the document0: No1: Yes

Deterimine whether to print the receive time stampwithin the document print area or not.

3 0 “Next doc” default settingwhen scanning with ADF0: No

1: Yes

Determine the default setting for “Next doc”scanning with ADF.If it is set to “0” the default setting for Next doc is

“No”, if is “1” the setting is “Yes”.2 1 “Next doc” default setting

when scanning with FBS0: No1: Yes

Determine the default setting for “Next doc”scanning with FBS.If it is set to “0” the default setting for Next doc is“No”, if is “1” the setting is “Yes”.

1 0 Enlarging the 24 dot-font-characters0: Yes1: No

Determine to print the characters on cover page orTx report to 150% or not.

0 0 Muti-T.30 monitor journalnumber0: No

1: Yes

If this setting is “Yes”, the journal report will beprinted not in the consecuted number but in thetable number to see the T.30 monitor.


SwitchInitial


7 0 Add TSI infromation to thereceive time stamp0: No1: Yes

Determine to add the senders fax number to thereceive stamp or not.







7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-109


SwitchInitial







2 0 Print the sending documenton the error massage sheet0: No1: Yes


0 0 Shortcut the fax number onthe journal list0: No1: Yes

Determine whether to print only the last 25characters of the fax number on the journal list andreplace the rest with “...”.




7 0 Reaction time to the keys onthe touch screen

Switch 7 6 5 4 Time1 1 1 1 150 ms1 1 1 0 140 ms 0 1 0 1 50 ms0 1 0 0 40 ms (Initial setting) 0 0 1 0 20 ms0 0 0 1 10 ms0 0 0 0 0 ms

6 1

5 0

4 0






7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-110

3.6 Clear Programmed Data / User SettingsUser programmed information such as address book entries, date, time, Transmit Terminal Identifier(TTI), Subscriber ID, etc., are stored in the unit’s Random Access Memory (RAM). A battery back upholds this information, when the power is lost.

This function does not clear the machine parameters, memory switches and unique switches.Therefore, this setting is useful to reset the user-programmed information but leave specificparameters and switches configured for a particular telephone system, etc.

To reset only each switch, see page 3-3, 3-62 and 3-88.Note: If desired, the All RAM Clear setting can be used to erase all users programmed information, all

documents in memory, and reset the memory switches and unique switches to factory defaults.For information on the All RAM Clear setting, see the next page.

1. To clear programmed data and user settings, from standby, press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <2>.

2. Press [Yes].

Note: To finish the operation without performing initialization, press [No].

3.7 All RAM ClearThe All RAM Clear setting will erase all user-programmed information, all documents in memory, andreset the memory switches and unique switches to factory defaults.

This feature may also be used to try and clear a machine malfunction or lock up. If possible, when theAll RAM Clear is used to reset a malfunction or lock up, it is advisable to print the machine settings,one-touch and speed dial listings to help in reprogramming this information.

Note: The All RAM Clear does not clear the machine parameters, life monitor and consumable ordersheet. If you need to clear them, see “Clearing the machine parameters,” page 3-3 or “Clear LifeMonitor” page 3-136 or “Clear consumable order sheet” on page 3-135.

1. To perform an All RAM Clear, from standby, press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <3>.

2. Press [Yes].

Note: To finish the operation without performing RAM clear, press [No].

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-111

3.8 T.30 MonitorIn all binary coded facsimile control procedures the HDLC frame structure is utilized. The basic HDLCstructure is shown below.

Preamble Binary coded infromation

Non-stabdard facilities frame(NSF) Called subscriber identification frame (CSI) Digital identification frame (DIS)

Flag Flag Address ControlFacsimilicontorlfield

Facsimiliinformationfield

Framechecingsequence (FCS)

The information in thisprotion is printed in the T.30monitor.

The control signal is identified by FCF (Facsimile Control Field). Additional 8-bit octet informationfollows FIF (Facsimile Information Field) and FC (Facsimile Control Field) to further clarify facsimileprocedures. This is added to DIS, DCS, DTC, CIS, CIG, TSI, NSC, NSF, and NSS signals.

3.8.1 Print T.30 MonitorThis mode causes the unit to print a G3 procedural summary of the last fax communication.


2. Press [Yes] to print the T.30 Monitor list.

3.8.2 Multi T.30 Monitor

The communications on the journal list are able to print.

1. Set the unique switch for Multi T.30 monitor to "1 (On)". (Unique switch 85 switch 0 )

2. Print the journal list and check the communication number of which to print the T.30 Monitor.


4. Enter the communication number and press [Enter].

5. Press [Yes] to print the T.30 Monitor list.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-112

3.8.3 How to see the print out

(Example for fax transmission)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-113

(Example for fax receipt ion)

TxFrame : Signals sent by machine printing T.30 report

RxFrame : Signals received from remote machine

DATA: Additional 8-bit octet information to clarify facsimile procedures. In the list, the data arein hexadecimal digits. At the top of each data shows the type of the signal.

TCF : TCF check sequence

PIX : Image data

[V17 MMR A3 0 F E]

Error Correction Mode (E=ECM on, page=EMC off)

Mode (U=Ultra fine: 600 x 600 dpi, H= Hyper fine: 400 x 400 dpi,F=Fine, N=Normal)

Receiver's minimum scan line time capability

Recording width document size

Compressing method

Data signalling rate

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-114

NSF, NSC, NSS:

NSF, NSC, NSS are nonstandard unit frames. The first three bytes of the FIF are specified by T.30.The subsequent digits are individually determined by the manufacturers. The first byte refers to thecountry code. The second byte is a spare; it is 00 (hex) presently. The third byte is the manufacturercode.

TxFrame RxFrame D A T A

NSF 20 00 00 45 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

The third byte is the manufactures code

The second byte is spare; currently set at 00H

The first byte indicates the country code

Indicates the NSF code

CSI, CIG, TSI:

CSI, CIG, TSI is composed of a maximum 20-digit number comprising the country code, area code,and subscriber’s telephone number. In the printed results, printing starts from the least significant digitof the telephone number. The following code table lists the codes used to make the 20-digit numberand their value. Below the code table is a CSI example.

Code Value Code Value Code Value Code Value

20 Space 32 2 35 5 38 8

30 0 33 3 36 6 39 9

31 1 34 4 37 7 2B +

An example telephone number of 123-456-7890 is represented as:


CIS 30 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 20 20 20 20 20 20

20 20 20 20 20

DIS, DTC, DCS:

DIS, DTC, DCS frames define the standard CCITT capabilities of the two units such as transmit andreceive speeds, coding methods, printer speed, etc.


DIS 00 EF F9 C4 80 81 80 00

The bits are in the following order:

( 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1) (16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9) (24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17)

(32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25) (40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33) (48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41)

(56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49) (64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57)

Table for hexadecimal digit to binary number:

Hex Binary Hex Binary Hex Binary Hex Binary

0 0000 4 0100 8 1000 C 1100

1 0001 5 0101 9 1001 D 1101

2 0010 6 0110 A 1010 E 1110

3 0011 7 0111 B 1011 F 1111

So in the above list the first "EF" is "11101111"(bit order 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1)

0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-115

A transmission with PPR signal:

The error frame in fax reception is identified using the post-message signal and PPR signal.


PPS MPS BF 4F 00 00 0F

PPR BC F0 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF

FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF

In PPS signal FIF, the pages, blocks and frames are displayed one value less than the real value.So in the above case:

Pages: 00 means one page

Blocks: 00 means one block

Frames: 0F means 16 frames

In PPR signal FIF, the error frame will be displayed with "1". In the above case the fist frame is "F0"and it means there was an error from frame 4 to 7.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-116

3.9 Printer maintenance modeIn case of followings, use this mode.

• When you have replaced the Fuser unit and/or Transfer roller.you have replaced the Fuser unit and/or Transfer roller.replaced the Fuser unit and/or Transfer roller.and/or Transfer roller.or Transfer roller.

• When “Call Service : XX” message appear in the LCD, access this mode to determine the cause of: XX” message appear in the LCD, access this mode to determine the cause of” message appear in the LCD, access this mode to determine the cause ofthe “Call Service : XX” error message.: XX” error message.” error message.

When you replace the Fuser unit or Transfer roller, you must set the count of replacementmanually

To access the printer maintenance mode:

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <6>.

The mode is contained within two main menu levels.

2. Select “Enter Replace Counter”, and press [Enter].

3. The LCD shows:

4. Select either “Replace Fuser” or “Replace Transfer” according to the parts you have replaced, andpress [Enter].If you have selected “Replace Fuser”, the LCD shows:

5. Press [YES]. The machine goes back to standby mode.

When “Call Service : XX” message is displayed on the LCD : XX” message is displayed on the LCD ” message is displayed on the LCD on the LCD n the LCD

To access the printer maintenance modes for determine the cause of the “Call Service : XX” error: XX” error” errormessage.

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <6>.

2. Select “Service Call” and press [Enter].

3. The kind of printer error will be displayed. If happens two or more troubles, the number of troublesis displayed on the right upper of the LCD. For example, when “Heater error” and “Drum FuseError” has occurred, the LCD shows 2.

4. Press [ENTER] to show the other printer error.

5. Press [RESET] to exit this mode.

Note: See “4.8 Call Service : XX” page 4-28 for the printer error messages and an explanation of eachare outlined.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-117

3.10 Monitor speakerIf you need to monitor the signal of fax communication, turn this mode to on. You can hear the signalsound with machine’s speaker during fax transaction.

1. From standby mode, press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <8>.

2. Select [On], and pree [Enter] to turn the mode on.

Note: To turn this mode off, perform step 1 and 2 by selecting [Off].

3.11 Test ModesThis mode offers the ability to print a test pattern and monitor certain unit output functions. Includedare followings.

• Life Monitor

• Printer Test

• Stamp test mode

• Port status (Factory use only)

• Set Background Level

• Image Quality Test (Factory use only)

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9> to enter the test mode.

2. Select the desired test mode and press [Enter].

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-118

3.11.1 Life MonitorThe life monitor displays the current software version, the total number of pages scanned, printed, andtransmitted, the number of drums replaced and the total page count on the current drum.

Note: The All RAM Clear setting does not clear the life monitor. To clear, see below.

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select “Life Monitor”and press [Enter].

2. Pressign the curesor key up or down displayes the following values:

• ROM Ver.0 = displays software version

• 01 to 02 = displays software version of the optional kitof the optional kit

• Serial No. = displays the machine’s serial number• Installation Date = displays the machine’s setup date

• Scan Pages = displays total pages scanned

• Print Pages = displays total pages printed

• Tx Pages = displays total pages transmitted

• Drum Replaced # = displays drum replaced times

• Drum Life Time = displays total working seconds of current drum

• Drum Life = displays total pages printed on current drum

• Toner Replaced # = displays toner cartridge replaced count

• Toner Life = displays total pages printed on current toner cartridge

• Fuser Replaced Co = displays fuser replaced count

• Fuser Life = displays total pages printed on fuser• Transfer Rplcd Co = displays transfer roller replaced count

• Transfer Life = displays total pages printed on current transfer roller

3. Press [Close] to exit the display life monitor

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-119

3.11.2 Printer TestThe Printer Test mode offers seven different test patterns as shown below.

Checkered Squares Paper Scum

Half-tone 1 Halft-tone 2 White Black

D: Halftone E: Halftone2 F: White G: BlackD: Halftone E: Halftone2 F: White G: Black: Halftone E: Halftone2 F: White G: BlackE: Halftone2 F: White G: Black: Halftone2 F: White G: BlackF: White G: Black: White G: BlackG: Black: Black

Ladder Magin pattern

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-120

1. Press SETTING, *, 0, 9, then select “Test Pattern Print” and press [Enter].

2. Select the desired pattern displayed and press [Enter].

3. Select the paper size to test and press [Enter].

4. Press [Yes].

The selected pattern will be printed continuously.

Note: Press <STOP> to stop printing.

5. To select another pattern, repeat the steps 1 to 4.

3.11.3 Stamp test modeThis mode tests the stamp. When it is set to on, the stamp will be stamped on the document at aregular interval.

Note: The stamp is an option unit.

1. Load test documents into the automatic document feeder (ADF).

2. Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select “Stamp Test mode” and press [Enter].

3. Press [Enter] to start the stamp test.

4. Press <Reset> to exit the stamp test mode.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-121

3.11.4 Port StatusThis test mode is not applicable to field service of this machine.

3.11.5 Set Background LevelThe background level is an established threshold used to help measure the reflective ability of ascanned document. This threshold can change if the scanner lamp, CCD, or the ballast is replaced;therefore this mode should be used to reset the threshold when these items are changed.

The Set Background Level mode allows the level to be set without erasing memory contents.Note: The background seal at the inside of the scanner cover should be cleaned prior to setting the

background level to ensure an accurate reading.

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select “Background level” and press [Enter].

2. Press [Start] to start the background level setting.After the background level setting, the machine goes back to the standby mode.

3.11.6 Image quality test (OfficeBridge option only)This test mode is not applicable to field service of this machine.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-122

3.12 Print Machine Parameters, Memory Switch and

Unique Switch SettingsThis function instructs the unit to print a list of the machine parameter, memory switch and uniqueswitch settings. The list shows the default and current settings for each. After printing, the unit returnsto standby.

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, < 1>, <0>.

2. Press [Yes] to start printing.

3.13 Factory FunctionsThis factory functions provide several machine testes including LED and LCD tests, a keypad test,memory tests, a RTC test, etc.

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>.

2. To select the desired test mode, press <> or <> and scroll the list.

• Prints a list of the Factory Functions• LED test

• LCD test

• Panel test

• SRAM check

• DRAM check

• RTC test

• Page memory check

• ATDC adjustment

• Generate bell test

• Toner supply mode

• Lamp measurement

3.13.1 Function List

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>.

2. Select “Function List” and press [Enter].Select “Function List” and press [Enter]..

3. Press [Yes].

A list of the Factory Functions will be printed. After printing the unit will return to standby.. After printing the unit will return to standby.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-123

3.13.2 LED Test

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select “LED Test”.

2. Press [Enter].

Pressing <Start>, all green LEDs will turn on.Pressing <Start> again, all red LEDs will turn on.Pressing <Start> the third time, all LEDs will turn on.

3. Press <Stop> to exit the LED test mode.

3.13.3 LCD TestThis mode displays two test patterns in LCD.

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select “LCD Test”.

2. Press [Enter].

Pressing <Start>, all dots will turn on.

Next pressing <Start>, all dots will turn off.

Next pressing <Start>, characters will be displayed.

3. Press <Stop> to exit the LCD test mode.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-124

3.13.4 Panel Key Test

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select “Panel Test”.

2. Press [Enter].

3. As each button on the keypad is pressed, a representative name as show in the following table willbe displayed.

Key Indication in LCD Key Indication in LCD

ENERGY SAVE EnergySave Numeric keys 0 through#

Tenkey 1 to #

COPY Copy START Start

FAX Fax STOP Stop

SCAN Scanner INTERRUPT Interrupt

CONTRAST LCD_Contrast SPEED DIAL Anykey 1

FAX CANCEL / JOBCONFIRM. Fax Stop/Conf On-hook Anykey 2

Panel key 1~4 Function 1~4 TTI Anykey 3

ONLINE Online LIST Anykey 4

VOICE GUIDANCE Voice guidance MACRO Reg Key macro

RESET Reset M1~ M3 key macro 1 ~ 3

MENU Menu One-touch dial 1 ~ 56 Speed dial 1 ~ 56

4. Press <Stop> twice to cancel the key panel test.

3.13.5 SRAM Check This mode is used to test the SRAM memory where user programmed parameters such as date, time,

TTI, etc are stored.

Note: When this test is executed, the unit will perform an All RAM Clear.

The All RAM Clear erases all user settings and resets all memory switches, machine parameters andunique switches to factory defaults.

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select “SRAM Check”.

2. Press [Enter].

3. Enter the HEX code (00 ~ FF) using numeric keypad, then press <Start>. The HEX code is writtento, then read from memory. After that, the result (OK/NG) will be shown in the display. Then themachine will return to factory function. To enter A, B, C, D, E and F, see table below.

A B C D E F

Seped dial Macro 01 02 On-hook M1

The data are written to, then read from each address. The results are shown in the display. If theread/write test is successful, the display will show “OK”.

If some portion of the read/write test fails, the display will show “NG” with the address and the data

name.

4. Upon completion, the machine returns to the test mode.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-125

3.13.6 DRAM Check This mode is used to test the DRAM memory, or document memory.

Note: When this test is performed, an All DRAM Clear will be performed by the unit. The All RAMclear erases all user settings and resets all memory switches, machine parameters and uniqueswitches to factory defaults.This is a read/write test that requires a few moments to complete.

Note: Perform a DRAM test whenever a memory upgrade is added to the unit.

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select “DRAM Check”.

2. Press [Enter].

3. Enter the HEX code (00 ~ FF) using numeric keypad and one-touch key [01] to [06], then press<Start>.

4. Depending on the amount of DRAM in the unit, press 0, 1, 2, or 3 on the numeric keypad.Please refer to the following table:

Note: Usually, press “0”.

Press Check area

0 All DRAMs1 The memory on the main control board

2 The 32MB expansion Memory PCB

5. Press <Start>.

The machine starts checking and the result (OK/NG) will be show n in the display.

For example, if the check area is “0” and all memory area OK, you will see:

5. Press <Reset> to exit the test mode.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-126

3.13.7 RTC(real time clock) TestThis test mode is not applicable to field service of this machine.

3.13.8 Page memory check When the letters are not printed correctly, perform this test.

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select “Page Memory check”.

2. Press [Enter].

3. Select the desired checking area and press [Enter].

4. The machine starts checking and the result (OK/NG) will be shown in the display.If NG is shown, perform the DRAM clear (page 3-136), and then go back to step 1.

5. Press [Close] to exit the test mode.

3.13.9 ATDC adjustmentThis mode adjusts the value of data read by the ATDC Sensor. When a reused drum is set to a differ-ent machine or in cased that the machine cannot memory the value, the former value must be input-ted manually using this mode.

Note: Before replacing the drum to other machine or replacing the PCB Main, first use this mode towrite down the current ATDC value.

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select “ATDC adjustment”.

2. Press [Enter].

3. Select “ASTD” and press [Enter].

4. Enter the ASTD value, and press [Enter].

5. Select “DeltaVCONT” and press [Enter].

6. Enter the DeltaVCONT value, and press [Enter].

7. Press [Close] to exit the mode.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-127

3.13.10 Generate bell test

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select “Generate Bell Test”.

2. Press [Enter].

3. The bell starts ringing.

4. Press <Stop> to stop.

3.13.11 Toner supply modeThis mode forces to supply the toner to the prescribed standard ratio, when it goes down for an

unexpected reason.

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select “Toner supply mode”.

2. Press [Enter].

3. Select “ON” to activate this mode and press [Enter].

3.13.12 Lamp measurementThis test mode is not applicable to field service of this machine.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-128

3.14 Line TestsThis mode offers several internal tests and ability to monitor certain unit output functions. Included arerelay tests, modem signal output monitoring, and DTMF output monitoring.

3.14.1 Relay TestThis mode tests the on/off operation of various relays and switches.

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <2>.<Menu>, <*>, <1>, <2>.

2. Select the line you want to test and press [Enter].

You can test line 1 only.

3. Select “Relay Test” and press [Enter].

4. Select the relay you want to test and press [Enter]. When it is selected, it will be highlighted.

OFHK_ON OFHK_ON H_ON H_OFF

L_ON L_OFF CONT24_ON CONT24_OFF

RI_ON RI_OFF Hook key

5. Press [Close] to exit the relay test mode.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-129

3.14.2 Tonal Signal TestThe tonal signal test permits the unit’s output tones to be monitored.

Note: To monitor the tones, an external monitoring device must be connected to the telephone line jack.

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <2>.<Menu>, <*>, <1>, <2>.

2. Select the line you want to test and press [Enter].

You can test line 1 only.3. Select “Tonal” and press [Enter].

4. Select your desired tonal signal test. When it is selected, it will be highlighted.

Refer to the table below.

Note: It may take several moments for output signal to change.

Signal Signal

None (stop signal) V17_2400_7200_W1_B4

400 Hz tone V17_2400_7200_W0_B1

600 Hz tone V17_2400_7200_W4_B1

1100 Hz tone V17_2400_9600_W1_B0

1300 Hz tone V17_2400_9600_W1_B1

2100 Hz tone V17_2400_9600_W1_B4

3000 Hz tone V17_2400_9600_W0_B1

3400 Hz tone V17_2400_9600_W4_B1

FSK WHITE V17_2400_12000_W1_B0

FSK BLACK V17_2400_12000_W1_B1

FSK _W1_B1 V17_2400_12000_W1_B4

V27_1200_2400 V17_2400_12000_W0_B1

V27_1600_4800 V17_2400_12000_W4_B1

V29_2400_7200 V17_2400_14400_W1_B0

V29_2400_9600 V17_2400_14400_W1_B1

V17_2400_7200_W1_B0 V17_2400_14400_W1_B4V17_2400_7200_W1_B1 V17_2400_14400_W0_B1

V17_2400_14400_W4_B1

Signal

V34_2400_2400 ~ 21600

V34_2800_4800 ~ 26400

V34_3000_4800 ~ 28800

V34_3200_4800 ~ 31200

V34_3429_4800 ~ 33600

VOICE

MELODY

GRBT


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-130

3.14.3 DTMF Output TestThe DTMF output test permits the unit’s DTMF tones to be monitored.

Note: To monitor the tones, an external monitoring device must be connected to the telephone line jack.

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <2>.<Menu>, <*>, <1>, <2>.

2. Select the line you want to test and press [Enter]. You can test line 1 only.

3. Select “DTMF” and press [Enter].

4. Select your desired tonal DTMF tone and press [Enter]. When it is selected, it will be highlighted.

Refer to the table below.

Note: It may take several moments for output signal to change.

Display Signal Display Signal

0 DTMF0 (941 Hz＋ 1336 Hz) ROW1 ROW1 (697 Hz)




4 DTMF4 (770 Hz＋ 1209 Hz) COL1 COL1 (1209 Hz)




8 DTMF8 (852 Hz＋ 1336 Hz)

9 DTMF9 (852 Hz＋ 1477 Hz)

AST DTMF6* (941 Hz＋ 1209 Hz)

SHARP DTMF# (941 Hz＋ 1477 Hz)

5. To stop outputting the DTMF tone, press <Stop>.

6. To select another DTMF tone, repeat steps 3-4.

Otherwise, proceed to step 7.7. To exit the DTMF output test, press <Menu> under not tests.


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-131

3.15 Mirror Carriage Transfer ModeImportant: The fax machine is shipped with mirror carriage locking plate for protecting the machine’

s mirror carriage during shipping. When installing the fax, slide the scanner locking knobback to its unlocking position. Then turn the power on and perform the following:

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <4>.

2. Select [Off].

Important: If reshipping, turn on this mode to move the mirror carriage to the transport position. Thenpower off and turn locking pins to the mirror carriage lock position.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-132

3.16 Consumable order sheetWhen the drum cartridge is near end of its design life or the toner cartridge is near empty, the machineprints (or transmit) the consumable sheet.

1 Dealer’s fax number 13 Dealer’s telephone number

2 Customer’s name 14 Dealer’s fax number

3 Customer’s address 15 Comments

4 Customer’s account 16 Customer’s sign

5 Serial number of the unit 17 Customer’s sign (Block letter)6 Customer’s telephone number 18 Drum rotate time (x 10 seconds)

7 Customer’s fax number registered by Initialsetting mode

19 Drum life time

8 Order item 20 Drum used percentage

9 Description of the order item 21 Total print pages

10 Quantity of the order item 22 Number of pirnted pages after toner ordrum was replaced.11 Dealer’s name

12 Dealer’s code 23 ROM version

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-133

3.16.1 Set consumable order sheet

1. Clear the junk data, if necessary (see “Clear consumable order sheet,” page 3-135).

2. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <5>.

3. Select “Consumable Order Sheet” and press [Enter].

4. Press “Dealer Name” and press [Enter].

Enter the Dealer’s name. The code may be up to 30 characters in length.

5. Press [Enter] to save the dealer’s name.

6. Select “Dealer Tel No” and press [Enter].

Enter the distributor’s telephone number. The phone number may be up to 20 characters in length.To enter the numbers, use the numeric keypad.

7. Press [Enter] to save the dealer’s telephone number.8. Select “Dealer Fax No” and press [Enter].

Enter the dealer’s fax number. The fax number may be up to 20 characters in length.

9. Press [Enter] to save the dealer’s fax number.

10. Select “Cust Account #” and press [Enter].

Enter the customer’s account number. The customer’s account number may be up to 10 charac-ters in length.

11. Press [Enter] to save the customer’s code.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-134

12. Select “Cust Name” and press [Enter].

Enter the customer’s account number. The customer’s account number may be up to 30 charac-ters in length.

13. Press [Enter] to save the customer’s name.

14. Select “Address 1” and press [Enter].

Enter the customer’s address for the upper row. The customer’s address may be up to 14 charac-ters in length.

15. Press [Enter] to save the customer’s address for the upper row.

16. Select “Address 2” and press [Enter].

Enter the customer’s address for the lower row. The customer’s address may be up to 14 charac-ters in length.

17. Press [Enter] to save the customer’s address for the lower row.

18. Select “Cust Tel”.

Enter the customer’s phone number. The phone number may be up to 20 characters in length.

19. Press [Enter] to save the customer’s phone number.

20. Select “Unit Serial #” and press [Enter].Enter the MFP’s serial number. The number may be up to 18 characters in length.

21. Press [Enter] to save the MFP’s serial number.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-135

22. Select “Order Sheet Setting” and press [Enter].

Determine if the machine prints or transmit the consumable order sheet when the printer consum-able is near end of its designed life.

If “OFF” is selected, the machine does not print or transmit the consumable order sheet eventhough the printer consumable is near end of its designed life.

23. Press [Enter] save the setting.

24. Press [Close] to go back to the Consumable Orders Sheet mode.

3.16.2 Clear consumable order sheetThe consumable order sheet keeps several items, these are not clear the all RAM clear function(Menu *, 0, 3). To clear the information of consumable order sheet:

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <5>.

2. Select “Clear Order Sheet” and press [Enter].

3. To clear the information of consumable order sheet, press [Yes].To finish the operation without clearing, press [No].

3.16.3 Print consumable order sheetTo check the customer’s information has been registered correctly, print the consumable order sheet.

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <5>.

2. Select “Order Sheet List” and press [Enter].

3. Press [Yes].

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-136

3.17 DRAM ClearNote: Perform a DRAM clear whenever a memory upgrade is installed to the unit or the DRAM is

replaced.

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <6>.

2. Press [Yes]. The DRAM will be cleared.


3. After clearing, turn the power OFF and ON.

3.18 Clear Life MonitorThe life monitor keeps a count of the pages scanned, printed, and transmitted, along with the drumreplacement count and total pages printed on the current drum. This mode clears these counters.

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <7>.

2. Press [Yes]. The counters will be reset.


3.19 Clear Optional DataThis mode clears all data and all activity journals for Printer controller.

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <8>.

2. Press [Yes]. The optional data will be reset.


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-137

3.20 Set Service CodeThis is the code to protect the life monitor clear operation. If it is not necessary to protect to the lifemonitor clear operation, abort this operation without entering the service code.

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <9>.

2. Your next mode depends on whether you’re creating or modifying the service code:

• If creating --- Go to step 3.

• If modifying --- Use the numeric keypad to enter the proper service code and press [Enter]. If

you enter an invalid code, the fax will reject the attempt and abort this operation.

3. Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit service code.

4. Press [Enter].

Note: To turn off the service code and return to normal life monitor clear (not protected), change thecode to 0000 by repeating steps 1-4 and entering 0000 in step 3.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-138

3.21 Life monitor maintenanceWhen you replace the main control PCB, you should register the previous several counter values ofthe life monitor.

1. Before updating the software or replacing the main control PCB, write down the counter values ofthe life monitor.

2. To confirm the life monitor, press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, <Enter>. Then scroll down the list. (See“3.11.1 Life Monitor,” page 3-118.)

3. After you write down the counter values of the life monitor, update the software or replace the maincontrol PCB.

4. Then, press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <0>.

5. Select [# Pages after toner replace] and press [Enter].

6. Enter previous values of the printed pages using the current toner cartridge, then press [Enter].

7. Select [# Page after toner warning] and press [Enter].

8. Enter previous value of the printed pages after the toner warning is displayed, then press [Enter].

9. Select [Drum Life Time] and press [Enter].

10. Enter previous value of the drum life, then press [Enter].11. Select [Drum Life], and press [Enter].

12. Enter previous value of the drum life, then press [Enter].

13. Select [Drum Replaced #], and press [Enter].

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-139

13. Enter previous value of the drum replaced count, and press [Enter].

14. Select [Toner Replaced #], and press [Enter].

15. Enter previous value of the toner replaced count, then press [Enter].

16. Select [Fuser Replaced Count], and press [Enter].

17. Enter previous value of the fuser replaced count, then press [Enter].

18. Select [Fuser Life], and press [Enter].

19. Enter previous value of the fuser life, then press [Enter].

20. Select [Transfer Rplcd Count], and press [Enter].

21. Enter previous value of the transfer roller replaced count, then press [Enter].

22. Select [Transfer Life], and press [Enter].

23 Enter previous value of the transfer roller life, then press [Enter].

24. Press <Reset> to go to the standby screen.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-140

3.22 Sensor input testThis mode can confirm the sensor status. When the sensor operates, the value next to sensor namechanges 0 to 1. For example, when open the 1st paper cassette, the CAS1:0 change to CAS1: 1.

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <2>.

1. Press <> or <> to display the dsired sensor.

Code Status Code Status

DS1 0: No document1: Document existing

DS2 0: No document1: Document existing

DRS Sensor for resist0: No document1: Document existing

DW1DW2

Document width detection

DW1 DW2 Width

0 0 Minimun

1 0 A4

0 1 A31 1 B4

DL1 Document Length Sensor forADF0: No document1: Document existing

TXIL 0: Scanner cover is close1: Scanner cover is open

APS 0: Platen cover is open1: Platen cover is closed

BIS Start scanning the documenton FBS0: On1: Off

HS(Home Sensor)

0: Mirror is other than thehome position

1: Mirror in the home position

BSS Document Length Sensor forFBS

0: No document1: Document existing

PSS 0: No paper1: Detect paper

PDS Paper sensor for exit area0: No paper1: Detect paper

SWBK Switchback sensor0: Off (No paper there)1: On (Paper there)

DUP Duplex sensor0: Off (No paper there)1: On (Paper there)

FEED2 Second cassette feed sensor0: No1: Yes

FEED3 Third cassette feed sensor0: No1: Yes

FEED4 Third cassette feed sensor0: No

1: Yes

DUPU Duplex unit detection0: No duplex unit

1: Duplex unitDSW1 Fuse (Drum sensor)

0: Burned (Used drum)1: Not burned

CART Cartridge sensor0: No cartridge1: Cardtridge

DEV Developing unit detection0: No unit1: Developing unit

LOCK_P Power unit fan lock0: Turning1: Locked

LOCK_F Fusing unit fan lock0: Turning1: Locked

LOCK1M Main motor lock0: Turning

1: Locked

LOCK2M Second motor lock0: Turning

1: LockedHYDRO Shows the humidity outsidethe machine

THRM Shows the temperatureoutside the machine

VCON Vcont value of toner ATDC Shows the ATDC value ofthe sensor

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-141

Code Status Code Status

TOS Toner in toner buffer0: Yes1: No

TEMP Show the internaltemperature of heat roller.

PES Paper Empty Sensor0: Detect paper is 1st

cassette1: No paper in 1st cassette

PSIZE Paper size for 1st cassette1:A5R 2:A5 3:OTHER4:A4 5:F4 6:A38:B5R 9:B5 A:B4 C:A4R

J1_OP 1st cassette side cover0: Closed1: Open

PES2 0: Detect paper is 2ndcassette

1: No paper in 2nd cassette

PSIZE2 Paper size for 2nd cassette1:A5R 2:A5 3:OTHER4:A4 5:F4 6:A38:B5R 9:B5 A:B4 C:A4R

J2_OP 2nd cassette side cover0: Closed1: Open

PES3 0: Detect paper is 3rdcassette

0: No paper in 3rd cassette

PSIZE3 Paper size for 3rd cassette1:A5R 2:A5 3:OTHER4:A4 5:F4 6:A38:B5R 9:B5 A:B4 C:A4R

J3_OP 3rd cassette side cover0: Closed1: Open

PES4 0: Detect paper is 4th cassette1: No paper in 4th cassette

PSIZE4 Paper size for 3rd cassette1:A5R 2:A5 3:OTHER4:A4 5:F4 6:A38:B5R 9:B5 A:B4 C:A4R

J4_OP 4th cassette side cover0: Closed1: Open

PES_BS 0: Detect paper on bypasstray

1: No paper on bypass tray

PSIZEM Paper size for bypass tray0:A4R 1:A4 2:B5R 3:B5 4:A5R5:A5 6:OTHER7:POSTCARD 8:A3 9:B4

FR_OP Front cover0: Closed1: Open

LFTUP1 1st cassette liftup sensor0: No1: Yes

LFTUP2 2nd cassette liftup sensor0: No1: Yes

LFETUP3 3rd cassette liftup sensor0: No1: Yes

LEFTUP4 4th cassette liftup sensor0: No1: Yes

3. Press [Close] to return to standby mode.[Close] to return to standby mode.

Note: CAS2, JAM2 and PES2 do not change, when there is no second cassette attached.

SWBK does not change, when the machine has no duplex printing unit.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-142

3.23 Printer diagnostic modeThis mode can confirm the operation of each parts of the printer section.

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <3>.

2. Press <> or <> to select the device you want to set to ON.

Fan :Turns the cooling fan motor

Rx Motor :Turns the Rx motor

Lamp :Turns the lamp on

Clutch 1 :Turns the clutch of 1st cassette

Clutch 2 :Turns the clutch of 2nd cassette

Clutch 3 :Turns the clutch of 3rd cassette

Clutch 4 :Turns the clutch of 4th cassette

R Clutch :Turns the clutch of the resist roller

Clutch M :Turns the clutch of the bypass tray

Dup Clutch :Turns the duplex clutch

ALL OFF :Turns the all device to off

3. Press [Enter].

4. Press [Enter] again to exit.

3.24 Network service modeThis mode provides the following four items:

• Display the sum-check of internet fax board

• Delete the Manager (Admisitrator)

• All clear the registered parameters of the optional Internet fax board

3.24.1 Display the server sum-check

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <4>.

2. Select “Show Server Sumcheck” and press [Enter].Select “Show Server Sumcheck” and press [Enter].Server Sumcheck” and press [Enter].

3. Press [Close] to close the server sumcheck display.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-143

3.24.2 Delete ManagerClear the administrator information, when the administrator passward is missing and no one canmanage the network setting.

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <4>.

2. Select “Delete Manager” and press [Enter].Select “Delete Manager” and press [Enter].” and press [Enter].

3. Press [Yes].Press [Yes].[Yes].

3.24.3 All clear the registered parameters of the network boardYou can clear all the data of network settings like IP address, Subnet Mask or Default Gateway.

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <4>.

2. Select “Server data clear” and press [Enter].

3. Press [Yes]. The information will be cleared.


3.25 Flash Rom Sum Check This mode allows you to check Sum after the Flash ROM version is updated.

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <9>.

2. Press [Close] to return to standby mode.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-144

3.26 Printer registration adjustmentThis mode can adjust the print registration for each paper source.

For more detail, see “5.3 Adjustment” in section 5.

3.27 Set Service Report

3.27.1 Set the service reportIf using this feature, you should be enter following items:

• Report location 1 and 2 – Where to send the service report. Location 1 is the murateccustomer service number.

• Period – The report can be send either once in a determined month(s) or once in a month ona determined date and time.

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <4>, <2>.<Menu>, <*>, <4>, <2>.

2. Select “Setting” and press [Enter].

3. Select “Send Service Report” and press [Enter].

3. To activate the Service Report mode, select “On” and press [Enter].

4. Now you can enter the detail for the report.Press “Report Location 1” and press [Enter].

5. To send the service report to the customer service, select [On] and press [Enter].

6. Enter the fax number where to send the report. Press [Enter].

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-145

7. Press “Report Location 2” to enter another location. Otherwise, skip to step 9.

8. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to enter the location.

9. Select “Interval Months” and press [Enter].

10. Enter the interval for service report auto transmission from 1 to 12 months and press [Enter].

11. Press <Reset> to go back to standby mode.

3.27.2 Clear service reportTo clear the information of service report:

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <4>, <2>.<Menu>, <*>, <4>, <2>.

2. Select “Delete” and press [Enter].

3. To clear the information of service report setting, select “yes” and press [Enter].To finish the operation without clearing, select “No” and press [Enter]

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-146

3.28 Reset Printer TroubleThis mode clears the service call.

Note: Perform this operation after solved the trouble.

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <4>, <5>.

2. Press [Yes].

3.29 Cleaning modeThis mode rotate the feed roller and registration roller automatically so that you can clean the surfaceof them.

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <4>, <6>.

2. Press <Start>.

3. To rotate the feed roller, select “Feed Roller ON” and press [Enter].

4. Open the feeder cover and clean the feed roller.To stop rotating the roller, select “Feed Roller OFF” and press [Enter].

5. To rotate the pickup roller, select “Pickup Roller ON” and press [Enter].

6. Clean the pickup roller. The pickup roller is able to clean without opening the feeder cover.To stop rotating the roller, select “Pickup Roller OFF” and press [Enter].

3.30 Voice testThis mode makes it possible to hear all the voice guidance in order. You can adjust the volume in fivesteps by pressing the cursor key ( or )..

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <4>, <7>.

2. The voice guidance comes from the speaker one after another.

3. Press <Reset> to go back to the standby mode.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-147

3.31 Network SwitchWhen an e-mail address is registered as the archive destination, you can set the reroute function onor off. (For this MFP, only this function is available in the network switch.)

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <5>, <1>.

2. Select “Set Network Switch” and press [Enter].

3. Press <0>, <0>, <7>, and then [Enter].

4. Move to the cursor to the right switch and change it either to “0” or “1” using the numeric key.(0 is for “Off”. 1 is for “On”. The default setting is 0, OFF.)

5. Press [Enter] to save the setting.


3.32 Security function maintenanceThe security function is available regardless of the registered protect passcode.

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <5>, <2>.

2. Select the desired function and press [Enter].

3. Edit the function and press [Enter].

3.33 Measuring the black ratioThe black ratio of the scanned document can be measured. The maximum document size is A3 (600dpi).

1. Set the document to measure.

2. Press <Menu>, <*>, <5>, <4>.

3. Press [Yes].

4. When the measure is finished, the black ratio will be displayed on the LCD.


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-148

3.34 Service function menuAll the field service program modes are available from the menu.

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <7>, <7>.

2. Select the mode you want to enter and press [Enter].See this chapter how to operate each service function.

3.35 Quick Initial settingsAt installation of this machine, you should set some parameters according to the following procedures.

You can do the following setting with continuously.

1. Initial settings

2. Consumable order sheet settings

3. Service Report settings.

Note: Before starting the installation settings, clear the memory by pressing <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <2>,[Enter].

Entering initial settings

1-1. To start Initial setting mode, press <Menu>, <*>, <9>, <9>. The LCD shows:

1-2. Select “Language”, and press [Enter]. The screen may differ according to the country.

1-3. Select the desired language, and press [Enter].

1-4. Select “Current Time”, and press [Enter]. The screen may differ according to the country.

1-5. Enter the date and time using the cursor key and numeric keypad, and press [Enter].

1-6. Select “Daylight Saving”, and press [Enter].

Note: This will appear only for European version.

1-7. Select OFF or ON, and press [Enter].

When the setting is On, your machine automatically recognizes DST at 2 am on the appropriateswitch over Sundays each year.When the setting is Off, no automatic change will occur.

1-8. Select “Comm. Line”, and press [Enter].

Note: This will appear only for China and Japanese version.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-149

1-9. Select the desired type of dialing needed for the fax machine either tone or pulse, then press[Enter].

1-10. Select “Reception Mode”, and press [Enter].

1-11. Select the desired reception mode for the machine, then press [Enter].

1-15. Select “Dialtone Detect”, and press [Enter].

1-16. Select OFF or ON, and press [Enter]. Usually select OFF. If you select ON, the machine needsto detect the dial tone before calling.If you select OFF, the machine does not need to detect the dial tone before calling.

1-17. Select “TTI Enter/Edit”, and press [Enter].You can edit three TTIs.

1-18. Select “01”, and press [Enter].

1-19. Enter the TTI by pressing the numeric keys, and press [Enter].

1-20. Repeat Step 1-18 and 1-19 and to enter TTI2 and TTI3 as needed.

1-21. Select “Standard TTI”.

1-22. Select the default TTI among the entered TTIs, and press [Enter].

1-23. Select “TTI Number”.

1-24. Enter the fax number that will be displayed on other fax machines’ displays or printouts. The faxindustry term for this number is Subscriber ID. Press [Enter] to save the setting.

1-25. When the OfficeBirdge option is installed, enter the Time zone using the cursor key and numerickeypad.[Time zones] refer to the difference in time (up to ±12 hours) between countries from theGreenwich Observatory in England, which is taken to be standard time, and to regions that usethe same difference.

1-26. Press [Close].

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-150

The LCD now shows the Consumable order sheet setting menu.

• To set, clear or print the consumable order sheet, see "3-135 Consumable order sheet" howto operate these functions.

• To skip to the service report settings, press [Close]. See "3-147 Set Service Report" how tooperate the functions.

Press [Close] to go back to the standby screen.

3.36 Update the softwareThe software on the MFP are written on a flash ROM. Use a compact flash memory card (CF), toupdate the software. The are two ways to update the software:

· Automatic ROM update· Manual ROM update

3.36.1 Before updating the flash ROM

· The MFP does not detect the CF memory card when you insert it while power on. A malfunctionmay occur.

Turn the MFP to OFF before inserting the CF memory card, and then turn the MFP to on.Do not pull out the CF memory card while overwriting, because the system may get unstable.

· A CF memory card is not available for both automatic and manual update.

Both “Boot folder” and “ROM folder” can exist on one CF memory card, however either the boot orthe ROM folder can hold an update ROM file.

· You can not update the MFP while it is in use or the memory is in use.

Be sure that the MFP is not in use, and the remaining memory is 100%, before updating the ROM.

*When you perform the automatic ROM update, be sure the power is charged enough.

・ Do not turn the power off during updating.

Doing this will not recover the machine. In case the machine is unable to recover, replace the maincontrol PCB.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-151

3.36.2 Automatic ROM update

The MFP will update the ROM automaticary using the ROM date on the CF memory card.

To perform the ROM update the follwing conditions should all be filled:

• One ROM data file is save on “\Boot” folder.

• “Model code of MFP ROM data *1” matches with “Model code on the CF memory card *1”.

• “Model name of the MFP ROM data” matches with “Model name on the CF memory card”.

• “Distribution country of the MFP ROM data” matches with “Distribution country name on the CFmemory card”.

• “ROM version of the MFP” differs with “ROM version on the CF memory card”.

*1 : The model code for MFX-2700/MFX-2200 is “DB2”.

Operation

1. Power off the MFP.

2. Open the access cover, and insert the CF memory card to the main control PCB.

CF

3. Turn the MFP to on. The ROM update starts.

4. When the conditions are filled, the message bellow will be displayed on the LCD and the ROM dataon the CF memory card will be copied on the SDRAM. While the data copied, the ROM version andthe coping data volume will be displayed. (The transfering value displayed goes from 0 KB to thedata size on the ROM)

CF ROM Upgrade

MainBoardROM Ver. 2700 CHN A0A0A0 DB2

Receiving 4092KB

Do not remove CF card

(Sample)

5. When copy is finished, the update of flash ROM begins.While updating the flash ROM, the panel LEDs will turned on in order. When the ROM update isfinished, the MFP reboots automatically.

6. When the MFP is rebooted check the ROM version.Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, and select “Life Monitor” then [Enter].


8. Pull out the CF memory card. Close the access cover.

9. Turn on the MFP.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-152

3.36.3 Manual ROM update

You can choose the ROM data on the CF memory card from Main control board or OP550.

To perform the ROM update the all the following conditions should be filled:

For main contorl board

• One or more ROM data file is saved on “\ROM\(model code)*1” folder.• “Model code of MFP ROM data *1” matches with “Model code on the CF memory card *1”.

• No ROM data with the same model code is saved on “\Boot” folder.

*1 : The model code for MFX-2700/MFX-2200 is “DB2”.

For PCL print (OP550) board

• One or more ROM data file is saved on “\ROM\OP500” folder.

• “Model name of the MFP ROM data” matches with “Model name on the CF memory card”.

The ROM is able to overwrite with a new, old or same version ROM. The display shows to whichverwion the CF memory card is overwriting the MFP. however the MFP does not jedge the version.

Operation


2. Open the access cover, and insert the CF memory card to the main control PCB.

CF

3. Turn the MFP to on. The ROM update starts.

4. Be sure that the MFP is in standby mode and press <Menu>, <*>, <9>, <6>.

5. Select the PCB board to update and press [Enter].

6. If there are many ROM versions saved on the card, choose to which version to update, and press[Enter].

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-153

7. Confirm the ROM version and press [Enter].If the model code of the MFP ROM and the model code of the CF memory card matches the ROMupdate starts.

CF ROM Upgrade

File name 2700__A0AA0.CHN

[Close] [Enter]

8 When the copy is finished, Sum Check will be displayed.

CF ROM Upgrade

Sum Check

16BIT[N] : 41BD

[Close] [Enter]

9 When you updating the ROM of the Main control board, press [Update] to start to update the flashROM.While updating the flash ROM, the panel LEDs will turned on in order. When the ROM update isfinished, the MFP reboots automatically.

When you updating the ROM of the OP550, pressing [Update] will start to copy the ROM date fromthe MFP SDRAM to PCL print board.While the data copied, the ROM version and the coping data volume will be displayed. (The trans-ferring value displayed goes from 0 KB to the data size on the ROM)When the copy is over, the PCL print board updates the ROM.

When the ROM update is finished, the MFP reboots automatically.

10 When the MFP is rebooted check the ROM version.Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, and select “Life Monitor” then [Enter].

11 Power off the MFP.

12 Pull out the CF memory card. Close the access cover.

13 Turn on the MFP.

Improtant: DO NOT power off the machine while updating. Doing this will not recover the machine. Incase the machine is unable to recover, replace the main control PCB.

When you try to perform ROM update while the SDRAM is in use (out-of-paper=reception etc.), thefollowing message will be displayed and the machine reboots without updating the ROM.

CF ROM UpgradeMemory in use

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-154

3.36.4 How to save the ROM data on the CF memory card

For manual ROM update

Main control boad ROM

• Create a folder "\ROM\(oder cord)", save the ROM data on that root directory.Create a folder "\ROM\(oder cord)", save the ROM data on that root directory.

• One or more ROM data should be saved in the folder.One or more ROM data should be saved in the folder.• No "\Boot" folder should be saved in the root directory.No "\Boot" folder should be saved in the root directory.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-155

OP550 ROM

• Create a folder "\ROM\OP500", save the ROM data on that root directory..Create a folder "\ROM\OP500", save the ROM data on that root directory..

• One or more ROM data should be saved in the folder.One or more ROM data should be saved in the folder.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


3-156

For automatic ROM update

• Create "\Boot" folder and save just one ROM data on that root directory.Create "\Boot" folder and save just one ROM data on that root directory.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-1

4 Troubleshooting Procedures

4.1 Troubleshooting OutlineBefore troubleshooting a unit check the following:

• Is the power cord correctly connected to the machine?

• Are the telephone handset and the telephone line cord connected correctly?

• Is the telephone dial type set correctly?

• Is there paper in the paper cassette?

• Are the toner and drum cartridges set correctly?

• Are all covers closed correctly?

Before removing any portions of the machine or making any adjustments be sure thepower cord is disconnected from the unit. Check the following:

• The power source should be rated according to unit specifications.

• The unit should not be connected to an electrical circuit with other equipment or where voltages mayvary.

• The unit should be installed on a flat, level surface.

• The ambient temperature and relative humidity surrounding the unit should be 1010°C to 32°C (50°F to89.6°F) at 20% to 80% humidity with no condensation.at 20% to 80% humidity with no condensation.

• The unit should be located in a well ventilate area.

• The unit should receive necessary cleaning and maintenance.

The unit should be installed:

• Away from heat sources and heating or cooling vents.

• Away from water heaters, steam generators, humidifiers or other areas of high humidity.

• Away from dusty areas.• Away from areas where chemical fumes or gasses are generated or may collect.

• Away from areas exposed to direct sunlight.

Check the consumable:

• Verify that the recording paper supply is adequate and that it conforms to the type specified for usein the machine.

• Verify that the recording paper has been stored away from moisture and damp areas.

• Verify that the recording paper has not been damaged in any way.

4.2 Mirror Carriage ErrorSymptom: The mirror carriage doesn’t move.

Suggested corrective action:

1. Verify that the scanner unit locking pins have been released. Release the scanner unit locking pinsif they are not released. Then press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <4> to turn off the mirror carriage carrymode.

2. Verify that the timing belt is not out of joint.

3. Check the operation of HOME sensor at connector P148, on the PCB Scannser.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-2

4.3 Recording Paper JamAfter removing the jammed paper, please close the top cover once.

Mechanical errors

Symptom Possible cause Countermeasure

Jam in the paper

supply area

The selected paper is not suitable. Recommend customer to use suitable paper.

Wrinkled /bent /torn paper has been set in

the cassette.

Replace it with the new paper.

Paper is not loaded properly. Reload the paper by using the paper guides properly.

* The cassette has not been installed into

the machine properly

* The side paper guides have not been slid

up against the edges of paper properly.

* The paper cassette setting is wrong.

Instruct the user how to set the paper settings properly.

Faulty movement of some cassette parts. Check each movement of a cassette part.

Replace the faulty part.

Paper is stuck in the recording area. Remove the stuck paper.

The paper feed roller is worn out. Replace the roller.

Jam in the feed

area

Paper is stuck in the feed area. Remove the jammed paper.

Jam in the fuser or

the paper exit area

Paper is stuck in the fuser or paper exit

area.

Remove the jammed paper.

The fuser roller is not clean. Replace the fuser roller.

Electrical errors

Symptom Possible cause Countermeasure

Jam in the feed

area

“Please close the

blinking cover.”

The paper supply electromagnetic clutch

does not work..

* Check the wiring.

* Replace the paper supply electromagnetic clutch.

* Replace the PCB PRT.

* Replace the PCB Main.

The paper supply sensor (PSS) does not

work.

Check that the wiring and actuator are working properly. If

confirmed OK, then replace the PSS or PCB Main.

Jam in the feed

area

“Please close the

blinking cover.”

The malfunction of the PPS. Check that the wir ing and actuator are working properly. If

confirmed OK, then replace the PSS or PCB Main.

Jam in the feed

area

“Check papersize.....”

The paper size is not correct. Check that the paper, paper size settings, sensor, and wir-

ing (including the operation.) Replace the PCB PRT.

Jam in the fuser or

paper exit area

The paper discharge sensor (PDS) does

not work.

Check that the wiring and actuator are working properly. If

confirmed OK, then replace the PDS or PCB Main.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-3

4.4 Document Feeder Jam

ADF

Mechanical Errors

Symptom Possible Cause Countermeasure

While

feeding adocument

The ADF does not feed the

document.

The pickup roller is dirty or worn out. Clean the roller.

Replace the roller.

The power of the separation roller

is getting decrease. The separation

pressure does not match the paper

source.

Adjust the separation pressure.

Clean the roller.

The motor is not rotating. Replace the motor, or the PCB ADF.

While

scanning a

document

The feeder stops the feeding

job while the document is taken

into the feeder.

The malfunction of the sensor.. Replace the sensor.

The motor power is not working

properly.

Replace the motor or the PCB ADF.

The roller is dirty. Replace the roller.

The roller is worn out. Replace the roller.

The document is stuck and gets

damaged while taken into the

feeder.

A foreign object entered the feed

area.

Remove the object.

The paper quality is not acceptable.

The paper shape is not acceptable.

Recommend the customer to use the

book scanner.

Sensor Malfunctions


While

feeding a

document

No beep sound when you

place the paper.

(The beep sound volume set-

ting could be OFF.)

DS1 defect 0) Press [Menu], [*], [2], [2] to display

the sensor job confirmation mode.

1) Confirm the LCD indication changes

by moving the DS1 sensor.

0: No document / 1: Document2) If the does not change, replace the

DS1 sensor.

3) Replace the sensor harness.

4) Replace the PCB scanner.

APS sensor defect 0) Press [Menu], [*], [2], [2] to display

the sensor job confirmation mode.

1) Confirm that the LCD indication

changes by opening and closing the

book cover.

0: Cover Open / 1: Document

2) If the LCD indication does not

change, replace the APS sensor.


4) Replace the PCB scanner.5) Replace the harness between the

PCB scanner and the PCB Main.

* The FBS does not work correctly while displaying the ADF sensor status.

Please do not open or close the FBS cover while displaying the ADF sensor status.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-4


While feeding

a document

The machine feeds the

document through the ADF

without scanning.

DRS sensor defect 0) Press [Menu], [*], [2], [2] to display the sensor job

confirmation mode.

1) Confirm that the LCD indication changes by opening

the ADF cover and pressing the filler.

0: No document /1: Document

2) If the display indication does not change, replace the

DRS sensor.



5) Replace the harness between the PCB scanner and

PCB Main.

The machine feeds the

document through the ADF

without scanning.

DS2 defect 0) Press [Menu], [*], [2], [2] to display the sensor job

confirmation mode.


the ADF cover and inserting the document from

above.

0: No document /1: Document

2) If the LCD indication does not change, replace the

DRS sensor.




PCB Main.

While scan-

ning a docu-

ment

The scan starting and end-

ing area are not correct.

The scanning size is not

correct.

DW1 or DW2 defect 0) Press [Menu], [*], [2], [2] to display the sensor job

confirmation mode.

1) Confirm that the LCD indication changes by moving

the document guides.

Document guide DW1 DW2

A5 0 0

A4 1 0

B4 1 1

A3 0 1


DW1 or the DW2 sensor.


4) Replace the PCB ADF.

5) Replace the PCB Main.


the PCB Main.

While a docu-

ment exits

The LCD shows a warning

while a document exits after

scanning.

DS1 or DS2 sensor

defect

Check [DS1 defect] first, then [DS2 defect].

The LCD shows a warning

after a document exits.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-5

Others The message, “Please

close the blinking cover.”

does not appear on the

LCD.

The blinking cover: The

ADF cover

TXIL sensor defect 0) Press [Menu], [*], [2], [2] to display the sensor job

confirmation mode.


and closing the ADF cover.

0: Cover Open / 1: Cover Close


TXIL sensor.




the the PCB Main.

The length of the docu-

ment has not been scanned

properly.

DL1 sensor defect 0) Press [Menu], [*], [2], [2] to display the sensor job

confirmation mode.

1) Confirm that the LCD indication changes by placing

B4 or A3 document on the hopper area.

0: No document / 1: Document


DL1 sensor.


4) Replace the PCB ADF.

5) Replace the harness between the ADF and scanner.



PCB Main.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-6

FBS Scanner

Mecannical Errors


An unusual noise occurs. The belt has not been firmly inserted into

the belt holder.

Check the belt.

The FBS motor gear is interfering with thefilm.

Check the interfering area

The motor actuation belt is getting too slack. Check the timing belt

Sensor Malfunctions


While placing

a document

The document

size can not

be scanned

properly.

BIS sensor defect 0) Press [Menu], [*], [2], [2] to display the sen-

sor job confirmation mode.

1) Confirm that the LCD indication changes by

opening and closing the book cover.

0: Cover Open / 1: Cover Close

2) If the LCD indication does not change,

replace the BIS sensor.3) Replace the sensor harness.


5) Replace the harness between the PCB

scanner and the PCB Main.

BSS sensor defect 0) Press [Menu], [*], [2], [2] to display the sen-



placing A3 on the book scanner area.

0: No document / 1: Document


replace the BSS sensor.



5) Replace the harness between the PCBscanner and the PCB Main.

While scan-

ning a docu-

ment

The lamp is

not illuminated.

Lamp defect Replace it.

Lamp FPC defect Replace it.

Lamp inverter defect Replace it

Harness for inverter controller defect Replace it.

PCB scanner defect Replace it.

The mirror

carriage is

touching the

home side (onthe left toward

to the front)

HS sensor defect 0) Press [Menu], [*], [2], [2] to display the sen-



opening and closing the book cover. 0: Not home position (The cover has been

opened.)

1: Home position (The cover has been

closed.)


replace the HS sensor.



5) Replace the harness between the PCB

scanner and the PCB Main.

The mirror car-

riage does not

work.

FBS motor defect Replace it.

PCB scanner defect Replace it.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-7

4.5 LCD Failure

Symptom What to confirm Countermeasure

1 The LCD shows

nothing.

1. Is the power switch turned on?. Yes

No

Check No.2.

Turn on the power switch.

2. Does the electrical outlet have access to

power?

Yes

No

Check No.3.

Check the power routing to the outlet.

3. Is the auto power off mode ON? (Is theEnergy Save Mode lamp illuminated?)

YesNo

Press the Energy Save Mode button toreset the mode.

Check No.4.

4. Has the power supply fuse blown out? Yew

No

Check No.4.

Check No.5.

5. Do CN2-13 and 14 of the power supply

have +3.3V output?

Yes

No

Check No.6.

Replace the power supply.

6. Do P12-13 and 14 on the PCB Main have

+3.3V output?

Yes

No

Check No.7

Check the harness between the power and

PCB Main.

7. Do P110-1 and 2 on the PCB PANEL A

have +3.3V?

Yes

No

Check No.8.

Check the harness between the power andPCB Main.

8. If you replace the LCD, the symptom will

be fixed.

Yes

No

Replace the LCD.

Check No.9.

9. If you replace the PCB Panel A, the

symptom will be fixed.

Yes

No

Replace the PCB Panel A.

Check No.10.

10. If you replace the PCB Main, the symp-

tom will be fixed.

Yes

No

Replace the PCB Main.

Replace the machine.

* If none of the solutions work, then replace the machine.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-8

4.6 Machine malfunction

No. Symptom What to confirm Countermeasure

1 The LCD shows

“Please close the

blinking cover.”

1. If you close the blinking cover, the symp-

tom will be fixed.

Yes

No

Solved.

Check No.2.

2. Is the cover secured firmly by screws? Yes

No

Check No.3.

Secure the cover properly.

3.1) Open the front cover or the side cover.

If you press INTERLOCK, the PCB PRT

P152-3 will change to +24V through GND.

No

Yes

Replace the INTERLOCK.

Check No.4.

2) Open the ADF cover.

If you press the TXIL, the PCB ADF

P1482-7 will change to +3V through GND.

No

Yes

Replace the TXIL.

Check No.5

3) Open the side cover 2 and 3.

If you press the J2COP, J3COP or J4COP,

the PCB cassette P4-1 will change to +3V

through GND.

Yes

No

Replace the J2COP, J3COP or J4COP.

Check No.6

4. If you replace the harness between thePCB Main and the PCB PRT, the mes-

sage will disappear.

YesNo

Replace the harness.Check No.8.

5. If you replace the harness between the

PCB ADF and the PCB SCAN, the mes-


Yes

No

Replace the harness.

Check No.8.


PCB Main and the PCB casette, the mes-


Yes

No


Check No.7.

7. If you replace the PCB cassette, the mes-


Yes

No

Replace the PCB cassette.

Check No.8.

8. If you replace the PCB Main, the message

will disappear.

Yes

No

Replace the PCB Main


* If none of the solutions work, then replace the machine.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-9


2 Documents jam

frequently.

The LCD shows

“Please reset the

document.”

1. Did you feed a single document? Yes

No

Check No. 2.

Check No. 3

2. Did you use thin paper or converted

paper?

Yes

No

Recommend the customer to use a book scanner.

Check No. 8.

3. Did you set documents more than the

capacity?

Yes

No

Check No. 4.

Check No. 5.

4. If you set documents within the capacity,

the symptom be fixed.

Yes

No

Solved.

Check No. 5.

5. Did you use wrinkled or curled docu-

ments?

Yes

No

Recommend the customer to use a book scanner.

Check No. 6.

6. Does the machine still feed documents? Yes

No

Check No. 7.

Check No. 8.

7. Does the machine still discharge docu-

ments?

Yes

No

Check No. 23.

Check No. 24.

8. Does the clutch rotate properly? Yes

No

Check No. 9.

Check the clutch condition.

9. Does the separate roller work properly? YesNo

Check No. 11.Check No. 9.

10. Does the transfer gear work properly? Yes

No

Check No. 10.

Adjust the gear.

11. Does the ADF motor rotate properly? Yes

No

Check No. 12.

Replace the ADF motor.

12. Is the separation pressure appropri-

ate?

Yes

No

Check No. 18.

Adjust the separation pressure.

13. Do CN2-3, 4, 5 and 6 of the power

supply have +24V output?

Yes

No

Check No. 13.



power supply and the PCB Main, the

message will disappear.

Yes

No

Replace the harness between the power supply

and PCB Main.

Check No. 15.

15. Do P12-3, 4 and 5, and P6-1 on the

PCB Main have +24V output ?

Yes

No

Check No. 16.


16. Has the DS1 sensor been installed

properly?

Yes

No

Check No. 17.

Re-install it properly.

17. Does the feeler for the DS1 sensor

work properly?

Yes

No

Check No. 18.

Replace the DS1 sensor.

18. Does the feeler for the DS2 sensor

work properly?

Yes

No

Check No. 19.

Replace the DS2 sensor.

19. Are there any foreign objects stuckaround paper guides? YesNo Remove the objects.Check No. 20.

20. Does the voltage level of P1487-1 on the

PCB ADF change to +0V when the DS1 is

ON, and to +5V when the DS1 is OFF?

Yes

No

Check No. 22.

Check No. 21.

21. If you replace the DS1 sensor, the


Yes

No

Replace the DS1.


22. Does the voltage level of P1486-1 on the

PCB ADF change to +0V when the DS2 is

ON, and to +5V when the DS2 is OFF?

Yes

No

Check No. 23.

Check No. 24.

23. If you replace the DS2 sensor, the


Yes

No

Replace the DS2.


24. Is the separation roller dirty? Yes

No

Replace the separation roller.

Check No. 25.

25. Is the pad separator dirty? Yes

No

Replace the pad separator.


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-10


3 “Complete” mark is

not stamped.

1. Is the stamp setting ON? Yes

No

Check No. 2.

Turn it ON.

2. Does the stamp has ink? Yes

No

Check No. 3.

Replace the ink pad.

3. If you replace the solenoid, the symptom

will be fixed.

Yes

No

Replace the solenoid.

Check No. 4.

4. Do CN2-3,4,5 and 6 of the power supply

have +24V output?

Yes

No

Check No. 5.


5. Does P1484-1 on the PCB ADF have

+24V output?

Yes

No

Check No. 7.

Check No. 6.


power supply and the PCB Main, the


Yes

No


Check No. 7.


tom will be fixed.

Yes

No



4 Documents skew 1. Have the document guides been

adjusted properly?

Yes

No

Check No. 2.

Re-adjust the guides properly.

2. Did you place different size documents at

the same time?

Yes

No

Set only the same size documents.

Check No. 3.

3. Are there any foreign objects on the

paper pass?

Yes

No

Remove the objects.

Check No. 4.

4. Have the separator roller and the pad

separator been worn out?

Yes

No

Replace them.

Check No. 5.

5. Are there any problems with on the

installations and operations of the sepa-

rator roller and the pad separator?

Yes

No

Check their operations.

Check No. 6.

6. Is the outer guide A deformed? Yes

No

Fix or replace it.


5 Documents get

wrinkled or torn

frequently.

1. Are they thin documents? Yes

No

Recommend customer to use the book

scanner.

Check No. 2.

2. Are there any foreign objects on the

document tray?

Yes

No

Remove the objects.

Check No. 3.

3. Do the documents get wrinkled or torn

around the feeding entry area?

Yes

No

Check No. 5.

Check No. 7.

4. Has the entry area of the outer guide A

been deformed?

Yes

No

Repair or replace it.

Check No. 7.

5. Is the roller separator dirty. Yes

No

Replace the roller.


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-11


6 The warning mes-

sage “ Lamp error.

Call for service.”

appears.

1. Are there any foreign objects (including

documents) on the document glass?

Yes

No

Remove the objects.

Check No. 2.

2. Has the lamp been illuminated? Yes

No

Check No. 3.

Check No. 14.

3. Has the sheet document press been

properly attached to the back side of the

platen cover?

Yes

No

Check No. 4.

Re-attach the sheet document press.

4. Is the sheet document press dirty? Yes

No

Clean the sheet document press.

Check No. 5.

5. Are the contact glass and the document

glass dirty?

Yes

No

Clean the glasses.

Check No. 6.

6. Is the mirror dirty? Yes

No

Clean the mirror.

Check No. 7.

7. Has the CCD harness come off? Yes

No

Connect the harness.

Check No. 8.

8. Is the home sensor getting loose? Yes

No

Check the sensor.

Check No. 9.

9. If you replace the home sensor, the


Yes

No

Replace the sensor.

Check No. 10.

10. Has the mirror carriage drive belt been

secured properly?

Yes

No

Secure the belt properly.


7 The message “Paper

supply empty.”

appears.

1. Did you load paper in the cassette

properly?

Yes

No

Check No.2.

Re-load paper.

2. Is there electrical continuity in the har-

ness between the PES sensor and the

PCB PRT?

Yes

No

Check No. 3.

Replace the harness between the PES

sensor and the PCB PRT.


ness between the PCB Main and thePCB PRT?

Yes

No

Replace the harness between the PCB

Main and the PCB cassette.Check No. 4.

4. If you replace the PES sensor, the mes-


Yes

No

Replace the PES sensor.

Check No. 5.

5. If you replace the PCB PRT, the message

will disappear.

Yes

No

Replace the PCB PRT.

Checak No. 6.

6. If you replace the PCB Main, the mes-


Yes

No



8 Paper jams or the

message “Open the

blinking cover and

check......” appears.

1. Is there any paper jam on the paper

pass?

Yes

No

Remove the paper.

Check No. 2.


ness between the PRS sensor and thePCB PRT?

Yes

No

Check No. 3, and the PRS sensor.

Replace the PSS sensor or the PCB PRT.


ness between the PDS sensor and the

PCB Main?

Yes

No

Replace the harness between the PDS

sensor and the PCB Main.

4. If you replace the PRS sensor or the PDS

sensor, the message will disappear.

Yes

No

Replace the PRS sensor or the PDS sen-

sor.

Check No. 5.

5. If you replace the PCB PRT, the message

will disappear.

Yes

No

Replace the PCB PRT.

Check No. 6.

6. If you replace the PCB Main, the mes-


Yes

No



7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-12


9 Documents skew 1. If you re-load the document and make

more than 10 copies, a document skew still

occurs.

Yes

No

Check No. 2.

Solved

2. Has the paper cassette been installed

properly?

Yes

No

Check No. 3.

Re-install it properly.

3. Does the cassette have any malfunctions? Yes

No

Replace the casette.


10 When using the

auto feeder, the

reception image

expanded.

1. If you print “Checkered Pattern”, the image

will expands more vertically than horizon-

tally.

Note: The following causes are also pos-

sible. The sender sent the document

data using unsuitable documents like

excessively thick paper, no carbon

paper, rear carbon paper, and so on.

Yes

No

Check No. 2.

The sender’s problem.

(It might be caused by using unsuit-

able documents, or sender transmission

problems.)

2. Is the drawing force of the feed roller B and

the heat roller correct?

Yes

No

Check No. 3.

Clean the feed roller B.

Replace the feed roller B and the fuser.

3. If you replace the PCB Main, the symptomwill be fixed. YesNo Solved.Replace the machine.

11 When using the

auto feeder, the

reception image

compressed.

1. If you print “Checkered Pattern”, the image

is more compressed vertically than hori-

zontally.

Yes

No

Check No. 2.


(It might be caused by sender transmis-

sion problems.)

2. If you replace the feed roller B and the

fuser, the symptom will be fixed.

Yes

No

Solved.

Check No. 3.

3. If you replace the PCB Main, the symptom

will be fixed.

Yes

No

Solved.


12 The printouts are

too light.

1. Are copied and test print images too light,

or uneven density?

Note: The following causes are also pos-sible. The contrast setting might be

not appropriate. Contrast irregulari-

ties are likely on printouts of docu-

ments containing thin lines or small

blue lettering.

Yes

No

Check No. 2.


(Possible causes are inappropriate con-trast setting, using colored documents,

poor line connection, using unsuitable

documents, or sender transmission

problems.)

2. If you replace the toner or the drum car-

tridge, the symptom will be fixed.

Yes

No

Replace the toner or the drum cartridge.

Refer to the “Image Quality Problems”.

13 Clock malfunction 1. Are there any errors in the clock setting

process?

Yes

No

Follow the instruction manual.

Check No. 2.

2. Is it possible to reset the clock? Yes

No

Check No. 3.



will be fixed.

Yes

No



7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-13


14 The LCD does not

show the message

for receiving or

sending a FAX.

1. Is an error message displayed on the LCD? Yes

No

Press [Reset] to delete the LCD message.

Check No. 2.

2. Has the phone line been connected? Yes

No

Check No. 3.

Disconnect the line, then press the trans-

mission switch.

3. Are you printing the check messages dur-

ing fax transmission?

Yes

No

Restart the transmission after printing the

check messages.Check No. 4.

4. If you replace the PCB panel A, the symp-

tom will be fixed.

Yes

No

Replace the PCB panel A.

Check No. 5.


PCB panel A and the PCB Main, the symp-

tom will be fixed.

Yes

No


panel A and the PCB Main.

Check No. 6.


will be fixed.

Yes

No



15 The machine does

not receive or send

a FAX.

1. Is the machine verifying the password? Yes

No

Check No. 2.

Check No. 3.

2. Is the password correct? Yes

No

Stop using the password verification, then

check No. 3.

Match with the password

3. Have the machine parameter output and

the memory switch equalizer been set

properly?

Yes

No

Check No. 4.

Adjust the settings properly.

4. If you replace the PCB NCU, the symptom

will be fixed.

Yes

No

Replace the PCB NCU.

Check No. 5.


PCB NCU and the PCB Main, the symptom

will be fixed.

Yes

No


NCU and the PCB Main.

Check No. 6.

6. If you replace the harness between thePCB panel A and the PCB Main, the symp-

tom will be fixed.

Yes

No

Replace the harness between the PCBpanel A and the PCB Main.

Check No. 7.


tom will be fixed.

Yes

No


Check No. 8.


will be fixed.

Yes

No



16 The auto memory

reception does not

work.

1. Has the auto memory receive lamp been

illuminated?

Yes

No

Check No. 2.

Press auto memory reception key to illumi-

nate the lamp.


will be fixed.

Yes

No


Check No. 3.


will be fixed.

Yes

No


NCU and the PCB Main.

Check No. 4.

4. If you replace the harness between PCB

panel A and the PCB Main, the symptom

will be fixed.

Yes

No


panel A and the PCB Main.

Check No. 5.


tom will be fixed.

Yes

No


Check No. 6.


will be fixed.

Yes

No



7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-14


17 A dial signal output

fails after entering

the number from

the numeric keys.

1. Has the line type setting been set correctly

?

Yes

No

Check No. 2.

Set the correct line type.


will be fixed.

Yes

No


Check No. 3.


PCB NCU and the PCB Main, the symptom

will be fixed.

Yes

No


Check No. 4.


PCB panel A and the PCB Main, the symp-

tom will be fixed.

Yes

No


Check No. 5.


tom will be fixed.

Yes

No


Check No. 6.


will be fixed.

Yes

No



18 The transmission

monitor does not

work.

1. Has the volume setting been set to OFF? Yes

No

Set the volume except OFF.

Check No. 2.

2. Has the setting for the transmission moni-

tor been set up?

Yes

No

Check No. 3.

Set up the setting.

3. If you replace the speaker, the symptom

will be fixed.

Yes

No

Replace the speaker.

Check No. 4.


PCB HVPS and the PCB Main.

Yes

No


Check No. 5.

5. If you replace the PCB HVPS (High Voltage

Power Supply), the symptom will be fixed.

Yes

No

Replace the PCB HVPS.

Check No. 6.


will be fixed.

Yes

No



19 An unusual sound

occurs.

1. Are there any foreign objects around the

gear or clutch?

Yes

No

Remove the objects.

Check No. 2.

2. Does the sound occur during the transmis-

sion?

Yes

No

Check No. 3.

Check No. 7.

3. Are there any objects interfering with the

belt?

Yes

No

Remove the objects.

Check No. 4.

4. Are there any objects interfering with the

roller or the roller pole?

Yes

No

Remove the objects.

Check No. 5.

5. Has the motor (FBS) sounded abnormal? Yes

No

Check No. 6.

Check No. 7.

6. Is the roller dirty? Yes

No

Clean the roller.

Check No. 7.

7. Does the sound occur while recording? Yes

No

Check No. 8.

Check No. 9.

8. If you replace the drum or toner cartridge,

the symptom will be fixed.

Yes

No

Replace either cartridge or both.

Check No. 9.

9. If you replace the transcriptional roller or

the fusing unit, the symptom will be fixed.

Yes

No

Replace the transcriptional roller or the

fusing unit.

Check No. 10.

10. Does the fan rotate smoothly? Yes

No

Check No. 11.

Replace the parts.


tom will be fixed.

Yes

No



7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-15


20 The document

memory can not be

backed up.

1. Is the memory backed up with the following

procedure?

1) During transmission

First disconnect the phone line, then send

the data. Next, turn the machine off while

waiting for re-dial. When you turn the

machine on again, the document memory

should remain.

2) During reception

Initiate out of memory reception without

the document, then turn the machine off.

When you turn the machine on again, the

document memory should remain.

Yes

No

Yes

No

No problem.

Check No. 2.

Put a jumper pin on JP2 of the PCB Main

to back up.

Check No. 2.

2. Has the battery been set to the PCB voice? Yes

No

Check No. 4.

Check No. 5.

3. Have the PCB voice and the battery been

connected to P2?

Yes

No

4. Has the PCB voice been connected to the

PCB Main?

Yes

No

Check No. 6.

Check No. 5

5. Is the voltage between the GND and the

PCB Main P12, 13 and 14 within the cor-

rect range? (+3.57V through +3.13V)

Yes

No

6. Is the battery voltage within the possible

value (above 2.2V) to be backed up?

Yes

No

7. Did you charge the battery for more than

72 hours?

Yes

No

Check No. 6.

Charge the battery.

8. If you replace the power supply, the symp-

tom will be fixed.

Yes

No


Check No. 7.


will be fixed.

Yes

No

Replace the symptom.


21 The message

“System stabiliza-

tion is needed. Turn

power off and on.”

is displayed on the

LCD.

1. Turn off the machine and wait for more than

three minutes. Turn the machine on. Does

the message disappear?

Yes

No

Problem solved.

Check No. 2.

2. Is the OfficeBrdige board or the Network

interface board equipped to the machine?

Yes

No

Check No. 3.

Check No. 4.

3. Is the OfficeBrdige board or the Network

interface board correctly connected to the

Main PCB?

Yes

No

Check No. 4.

Replace the OfficeBrdige board or the

Network interface board.

4. Is the printer control board equipped to the

machine?

Yes

No

Check No. 5.

Check No. 6.

5. Is the printer control board correctly con-

nected to the Main PCB?

Yes

No

Check No. 6.

Replace the printer control board or the

Joint PCB.

6. Is the NCU PCB correctly connected to the

Main PCB?

Yes

No

Check No. 7.

Replace the NCU PCB.


will be fixed.

Yes

No

Replace the Main PCB.


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-16

4.7 The Image Quality ProblemsIf any image failure has occurred, first make the initial checks (refer to page 4-1), then proceed to thecorresponding image failure troubleshooting procedure.

• Check the parameters for image quality adjustments and see if the problems solves.

• Adjust the background level and see if the problem solves. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9> and select[Background level, and press [Enter] then [Yes].)

• Determine if the failure is attributable to the input system (Image Reading Section) or the output system(Engine section):

1. Make copy full size copy of a document.

(Original) (Copy)

2. Make a reductioncopy of the document.

(Original) (Copy) - Input system cause

(Original) (Copy) - Output system cause

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-17

4.7.1 Blank Copy or black copyTypical Fault Image:

Blank copy:

Section Step Check Item Result Action

Scanner 1 Is the Scanner drive transmis-sion mechanism in good condi-tion?

NO Check and change as neces-sary.

2 Do the connections from CCD PCB Scanner PCB Main PCB LPH LED unit re-main intact?

NO Reconnect.

YES Change PCB Scanner, PCBMain, PCB LPH in that order.

Black copy:


Scanner 1 Does the Exposure Lamp turnON when make a copy withopen the platen cover?

YES Perform steps 4 and onward.

NO Check connectors and har-nesses and perform steps 2and 3.

2 Does the voltage across P14on pin 2 and pin 3 change fromDC0V to DC24V when step 1is performed again?

NO Change PCB Scanner.

3 Does the voltage across P14

on pin 1 and pin 3 changeto DC0V when step 1 is per-formed again?

YES Change Inverter or exposure

lamp, in that order.

NO Change PCB Main.

4 Are the mirrors and lens in-stalled properly?

NO Install them properly.

5 Are the mirrors and lens dirty? YES Clean or change.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-18

Blank copy and black copy:


Drum cartridge 1 Developing Unit is driven prop-erly.

NO Correct or change drive cou-pling mechanism.

2 Developing bias contact termi-nal, glide bias, sealed groundor come electrode is dirty ordeformed.

YES Clean or change the drum car-tridge.

LED unit 3 Is the LED unit (lever B3) setproperly?

NO Install it properly.

PCBs 4 LED unit and PCB LPH con-nected properly?

NO Correct.

Transfer 5 Image transfer current contactterminal is dirty or deformed.

YES Clean or change the terminal.

- 6 Is the trouble settled withabove steps?

NO Change drum cartridge.Change LED unit.Change High Voltage Power Supply.Change PCB LPH.

Change PCB PRT.Change PCB Main.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-19

4.7.2 Low Image Density or rough imageTypical Fault Image:


Scanner 1 Image transfer current contactterminal is dirty or deformed.

NO Check and change as neces-sary.


NO Reconnect.


3 Are the press document plateand contact glass dirty?

YES Clean each parts and set thebackground level again.

4 Are you copying a thick volumewhile trying to close the platencover trying to close?

YES Copy with opened platen cov-er.


LED 1 Is the LED unit (lever B3) setproperly?

NO Install properly.

Transfer 2 Image transfer current contactterminal is dirty or deformed.

YES Clean or change the terminal.

Drum cartridge 3 Developing bias contact termi-

nal, glid bias, sealed groundor come electrode is dirty ordeformed.

YES Clean or change the drum car-

tridge.


NO Change drum cartridge.Change transfer roller.Change LED unit.Change High Voltage Power Supply.Change PCB LPH.Change PCB PRT.Change PCB Main.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-20

4.7.3 Foggy backgroundTypical Fault Image:


- 1 Sunlight or any other extrane-ous light enters the copier.

YES Protect the copier from ex-trane-ous light.

Scanner 1 Are the press document plateand contact glass dirty?

YES Clean each parts and set theback-ground level again.

2 Are you copying a thick volumewhile trying to close the platencover trying to close?

YES Copy with opened platen cov-er.

3 Are the mirrors and lens dirty? YES Clean or change.

4 Is the Exposure Lamp dirty or

deteriorated?

YES Clean or change.

5 Do the connections betweenthe Exposure Lamp and IN-VERTER remain intact?

NO Reconnect.

6 Do the connections from IN-VERTER to PCB Scanner re-main intact?

NO Reconnect.

7 Do the connections from PCBScanner to PCB Main remainin-tact?

NO Reconnect.

8 Do the connections from PCBMain to High Voltage Unit re-

main intact?

NO Reconnect.


1 Sunlight or any other extrane-ous light enters the copier.

YES Protect the copier from extra-neous light.

Drum cartridgepart

2 PC Drum is dirty. YES Change the drum cartridge.

3 Comb Electrode contact termi-nal is dirty or deformed.


4 Grid voltage contact terminal isdirty or deformed.


Erase lamp 5 Erase Lamp is dirty. YES Clean.

6 Erase Lamp is conducting. NO Change.


NO Change drum cartridge.Change LED unit.Change High Voltage Power Supply.Change PCB PRT.Change PCB Main.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-21

4.7.4 Black Lines / White LinesTypical Fault Image:

Black lines:


Scanner 1 Are the mirrors, lens, contactglass or document glass dirtywith foreign matter?

YES Clean.


NO Reconnect.


Black lines :


Paper path 1 Paper path is dirty with toner. YES Clean

Drum cartridge 2 OPC Drum is dirty YES Change the drum cartridge.

Fuser 3 Fusing rollers are dirty orscratchy.

YES Change the fuser.


NO Change drum cartridge.Change PCB LPHChange PCB PRT.Change PCB Main.

White lines:


Scanner 1 Are the contact glass or docu-ment glass dirty with foreignmatter?

YES Clean.


NO Reconnect.


White lines :


Transfer roller 1 Image Transfer Roller is dentedor scratchy.

YES Change the transfer roller.

Drum cartridge 2 OPC Drum is dirty. YES Change the fuser.



LED 4 LED is dirty. YES Clean.

5 Is the LED unit (lever B3) setproperly?

NO Install properly.


NO Change the drum cartridge.Change PCB LPH.

Change PCB PRT.Change PCB Main.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-22

4.7.5 Black SpotsTypical Fault Image:



YES Clean.



NO Reconnect.


Paper pass 1 Paper pass is dirty with toner. YES Clean.

Fuser 2 Fuser rollers are dirty orscratchy.


Drum cartridgepart

3 OPC Drum is dirty. YES Change drum cartridge.

4 Comb Electrode contact termi-nal is dirty or deformed.

YES Clean or change drum car-tridge.

5 Grid voltage contact terminal isdirty or deformed.

YES Clean or change drum car-tridge.

Erase lamp 6 Erase Lamp is dirty. YES Clean.

7 Erase Lamp is conducting. NO Change.


NO Change drum cartridge.Change High Voltage Power Supply.Change the transfer roller.Change PCB PRT.Change PCB Main.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-23

4.7.6 Void areasTypical Fault Image:



YES Clean.



NO Reconnect.


Drum cartridge 1 OPC Drum is dirty. YES Change drum cartridge.



Fuser 3 Fuser rollers are dirty orscratchy.



NO Change drum cartridge.Change High Voltage Power Supply.Change PCB PRT.Change PCB Main.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-24

4.7.7 Smear on back Typical Fault Image:


Paper path 1 Paper path is dirty with toner. YES Clean






NO Change drum cartridge.Change High Voltage Power Supply.Change PCB PRT.Change PCB Main.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-25

4.7.8 Uneven image densityTypical Fault Image:




2 Is the Shading Sheet under theSize cover dirty?


3 Is the Exposure Lamp dirty ordeteriorated?



NO Reconnect.YES Change PCB Scanner, PCB

Main, PCB LPH in that order.




Drum cartridge 2 Developing unit is driven prop-erly?





NO Change drum cartridge.Change High Voltage Power Supply.Change the transfer roller.Change PCB PRT.Change PCB Main.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-26

4.7.9 Gradation Reproduction FailureTypical Fault Image:


Scanner 1 Is the Shading Sheet under theSize cover dirty?


2 Are the contact glass or docu-ment glass dirty with foreignmatter?


3 Do the connections from CCD

PCB Scanner PCB Main PCB LPH LED unit re-main intact?

NO Reconnect.





Drum cartridge 2 Developing unit is driven prop-erly?





NO Change drum cartridge.Change High Voltage Power Supply.Change PCB LPH.Change PCB PRT.Change PCB Main.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-27

4.7.10 Periodically Uneven ImageTypical Fault Image:

4040F4C500DA


Scanner 1 Is the FBS Motor drive gearcracked or dirty with foreignmatter?


2 Is the Scanner Motor securedproperly?

NO Secure properly.

3 Are the FBS belts attachedloose?

YES Adjust the belt tension.

4 Is the Mirror carriage secured

properly?

NO Secure properly.

5 Are the Mirror carriage drivebelts wound properly?

NO Wind the belts properly.

6 Are the Scanner rails damagedor dirty with foreign matter?



NO Reconnect.



Drum cartridge 1 Developing unit is driving prop-erly.


2 OPC Drum and Image TransferRoller are driven properly.


Paper transfersection

3 Register roller is driven prop-erly.


Fusing section 4 Fusing Unit is driven properly. NO Change the fuser.

5 Fusing rollers are dirty orscratchy.

YES Clean or change the fuser.

Transfer roller 6 Image Transfer roller is dentedor scratchy.


- 7 Is the trouble settled with

above steps?

NO Change drum cartridge.

Change driving unit.Change PCB LPH.Change PCB PRT.Change PCB Main.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-28

4.8 Service Call ErrorWhen certain machine problems occur these messages will appear in the LCD.

4.8.1 Check the error messageWhen certain machine problems occur a “Service call” message will appear on the LCD. When thismessage appears, access the printer maintenance mode to determine the cause of the “Call Service” errormessage. If there are detail numbers to that error, the numbers are also available to see on this mode.

The error message will be displayed on the LCD:

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <6>, and select “Service Call” and press [Enter].

2. The detail of printer error will be displayed.

3. If two or more errors have occurred at the same time, press or of the cursor key to see all the

messages.4. Press <Reset> to go back to the standby screen.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-29

The errors messages and an explanation of each are outlined below.

Code Error Message Error MessageError Message04: Second Rx motor Errormotor Error06: Cassette Liftup Error (First cassette)07: Cassette Liftup Error (Optional second cassette)08: Rx motor Errormotor Error0B: Fan ErrorFan ErrorFan Error0D: Temperature / Humid Sensor Error0E: Fan Control Thermistor Error)11: ATDC Error (Vcont value abnormal error)12: ATDC Error (Astd value abnormal error)15: Cassette Liftup Error (Optional third cassette)16: Cassette Liftup Error (Optional fourth cassette)18: Fuser ErrorFuser ErrorFuser Error1E: Drum fuse ErrorDrum fuse ErrorDrum fuse Error46: ATDC Error (Initialize time-up error)47: ATDC Error (Disconnection error)49: ATDC Error (Toner density control time-up error)4A: ATDC Error (Toner density high concentration error)4B: ATDC Error (Toner density low concentration error)4D: Toner Empty Sensor Error

04: Second Rx motor error

Causes:

The machine checks the motor error signal from two minutes after the second Rx motor starts driving.When the error signal is detected for 100 ms, this messages will be displayed.


1. Check the connection between RX Motor2 and the PCB PRT.

2. Verify the RX Motor2 rotates when the Power is ON.

3. Check the Power is supplied to the RX Motor2.

4. Replace the RX Motor1 if it doesn't rotate.

5. Replace the PCB PRT.

6. Replace the PCB Main.

06: Cassette Liftup Error (First cassette)

07: Cassette Liftup Error (Optional second cassette)

15: Cassette Liftup Error (Optional third cassette)

16: Cassette Liftup Error (Optional fourth cassette)

Causes:The liftup sensor does not switch on within 10 seconds, after the cassette starts to lift up the paper.


1. Check the connection between the Lift up motor and the PCB PRT.

2. Verify the Lift up motor rotates when the cassette close.

3. Replace the Lift up motor.



7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-30

08: Rx motor error

Causes:The machine checks the motor error signal from two minutes after the Rx motor starts driving. Whenthe error signal is detected for 100 ms, this messages will be displayed.


1. Check the connection between RX Motor1 and the PCB PRT.

2. Verify the RX Motor1 rotates when the Power is ON.

3. Check the Power is supplied to the RX Motor1.

4. Replace the RX Motor1 if it doesn't rotate.



0B: Fan Error

Causes:

The machine checks the fan error signal from two minutes after the second Rx motor starts driving.When the error signal is detected for 100 ms, this messages will be displayed.


1. Verify the inside FAN rotates when the Power is ON.

2. Check the connection between the FAN and the PCB PRT.

3. Replace the FAN if it doesn't rotate.



0D: Temperature / Humid Sensor Error


1. Check the connection between the Temp/Humid Sensor and the PCB PRT.

2. Replace the Temp/Humid Sensor.



0E: Fan Control Thermistor Error


1. Check the connection between the PCB Thermistor and the PCB LPH.

2. Check the connection between the PCB LPH and the PCB MAIN.

3. Replace the PCB Thermistor.


5. Replace the PCB LPH.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-31

11: ATDC Error (Vcont value abnormal error)

12: ATDC Error (Astd value abnormal error)

46: ATDC Error (Initialize time-up error)

47: ATDC Error (Disconnection error)

Vcont (Vlotage control) : This is the voltage that controls the ATDC sensor.

Astd (Answer standard) : This is target value of the toner density on the drum surface.


1. Check the connection between the Drum Cartridge and the PCB PRT.

2. Check the connection between the PCB PRT and the PCB Main.

3. Replace the Drum Cartridge.



18: Fuser errorCauses:When the fuser miss to fill out the following conditions:(The number indicates the detailed error code on the LCD)

4 The fuser does not become to temperature (Temp 2 :125 °C) within 60 seconds.5 The fuser detected a temperature higher than 250 °C.6 The fuser does not become warmer more than 8 seconds during printing.7 The fuser detected a lower temperature than 35 °C after the heater is set to ON for four seconds.8 The fuser detected a higher temperature than 190 °C for 50 ms when sleep mode temperature

(35 °C ) and standby mode temperature (125 °C ) is set up.


1. Turn on the power again, and verify the fuser warms up.

2. Check the connection between Fusing thermistor and PCB Main.

3. Check the connection between PCB Main and LVPS.

4. Check the connection between Fuser and LVPS.

5. Replace the Fuser.

6. After Replace the fuser, verify the fuser warms up when the power is ON.


8. After Replace the PCB Main, verify the fuser warms up when the power is ON.

9. Replace the LVPS.

1E: Drum fuse errorCauses:The machine could not blowout of the fuse.



2. Check the connection between the PCB PRT and PCB Main.3. Replace the PCB PRT.

4. Replace the Drum Cartridge.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-32

49: ATDC Error (Toner density control time-up)

4A: ATDC Error (Toner density high concentration error)

4B: ATDC Error (Toner density low concentration error)



2. Check the connection between the PCB PRT and the PCB Main.3. Replace the Drum Cartridge.



6. Replace the Screw Clutch.

4D:Toner Empty Sensor Error


1. Check the connection between the Toner Empty Sensor and the PCB PRT.

2. Check the connenction between the PCB PRT and PCB Main.

3. Replace the Toner Empty Sensor.



7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-33

4.9 Error CodesIf an error occurs during a communication, a check message will be printed. The following provides anexplanation of the information found on check messages.

• A possible solution to the problem

• The date and time of the attempted communication

• The sending location (if the remote fax has a Location ID)

• The number of pages which got through before the error terminated the call

• The error code

• The sample document.

You will also see a code listed in the Result column of the report. Result codes indicate the specific problemencountered:

• “D” codes occur while dialing

• “R” codes occur during reception

• “T” codes occur during transmission

Here is a list of error codes the fax machine may print.

4.9.1 Dialing errorsD.0.2 The remote unit is busy. Try the call again.

D.0.3, The remote unit didn’t respond, the call couldn’t be completed or stop was pressed duringD.0.8 dialing. Retry the call. If your machine repeats the message, call the remote fax unit’s operator

and verify that unit is operating properly.D.0.6, Either the remote unit didn’t respond, the call somehow didn’t go through or STOP wasD.0.7 pressed during dialing. Try the call again.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-34

4.9.2 Reception errors

R.1.1 T1 time-out. The calling unit was not a fax machine or the transmitting unit is havingdifficulties.

R.1.2 The two fax machines were incompatible. Your machine sends and receives only ITU-TGroup 3 fax communication, the industry standard since the early 1980s.

R.1.4 Someone pressed STOP during fax reception.

R.2.3 Poor phone line conditions made fax communication impossible. Enable the one secondpause after CED on Memory Switch 020. Also try increasing the echo wait time on MemorySwitch 021 if echo is on the line.

R.3.1 No response to CFR. DCN was received from the transmitter. Poor line conditions madecommunication impossible. Adjust the echo wait time on Memory Switch 021. Try increasingthe output levels via Memory Switch 011 0-3.

R.3.3 Too many errors were detected during data reception. The carrier was interrupted. Increasethe data error rate on Memory Switch 020.

R.3.4 DCN was received after FTT. Communication was not possible at 2400 bps. Poor phone lineconditions prevented fax communication. Enable the Eye Quality Check on Memory Switch031 and 032.

R.4.1 The machine received too large length data that over your machine’s limit.R.4.2 MPS/EOM/EOP was not received. Either the line disconnected before reception was

completed or too many errors were detected by the receiving unit. Adjust the data error rateon Memory Switch 020. It may also be necessary to decrease the receive communicationspeed via Memory Switch 020.

R.4.4 The receiving fax machine has reached its memory capacity.

R.5.1 DCN was received instead of RR during ECM communication.

R.5.2 Line noise or other problems prevented ECM reception.

R.8.1 A compatibility error occurred.

R.8.10 Line noise or other problems prevented line probing.

R.8.11 The fax machine timed out while waiting for the retrain signal.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


4-35

4.9.3 Transmission errors

T.1.1 T1 time-out. The remote fax machine didn’t respond to your machine. This usually occursduring a manual transmission or when an incorrect number was dialed. Call someone at theremote machine.

T.1.4 Someone pressed STOP during fax transmission.

T.2.1 CFR or FTT was not received from the remote machine. Either the phone line disconnectedduring fax communication or transmission became impossible due to bad phone line

conditions. Try the call again. It may be necessary to increase the output levels on MemorySwitch 011 0~3. The receive machine may also have closed network or block junk faxenabled.

T.2.2 The two fax machines were incompatible. No mailbox at receiver or security transmission isenabled.

T.2.3 FTT was received from the remote machine at 2400 bps. Bad phone line conditions madefax communication impossible. Conditions can change rapidly, so try the call later. Turn onthe echo protect tone on Memory Switch 010. Also adjust the interval between DCS and TCFon Memory Switch 011. If the problem persists, try increasing the output levels on MemorySwitch 011 0~3.

T.3.1 The page counter in the fax machine detected a document feeder error during transmission.

Carefully re-insert the document into the feeder and re-try the call.T.4.1 No response to MPS/EOP/EOM. Poor phone lines caused the receiving unit to disconnect.

Adjust the interval between CFR and data on Memory Switch 011. Try increasing the outputlevels on Memory Switch 011 0~3. It may also be necessary to adjust the transmit speed onMemory Switch 010.

T.4.2 RTN was received from the remote machine. After transmission began, poor line conditionsdeveloped. Try the call again. Attempt the solutions described for the T.4.1 error.

T.4.4 Poor line conditions prevented transmission. PIP was received. The transmission wasinterrupted by the call mode. The receiving unit may be experiencing problems. Try the callagain.

T.5.1 No response to RR from the remote machine. Line noise or other problems prevented ECM

transmission. Increase the ECM response time on Memory Switch 012.T.5.2 No response to CTC. Line noise or other problems prevented ECM transmission. Increase the

ECM response time on Memory Switch 012.

T.5.3 EOR was received from the remote unit but further transmission was not possible. AdjustMemory Switch 015 for this problem.

T.8.1 A compatibility error occurred.

T.8.10 Line noise or other problems prevented line probing.

T.8.11 The remote fax machine didn’t complete the equalizer training phase.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-1

5 Maintenance & Adjustment

5.1 Maintenance schedule ..................................................................................................... 5-2

5.2 Re/Disassemble ............................................................................................................... 5-3

5.2.1 COVERS ................................................................................................................... 5-5

5.2.2 PCBS ....................................................................................................................... 5-17

5.2.3 SCANNING SECTION ............................................................................................ 5-31

5.2.4 PRINTER SECTION ................................................................................................ 5-68

5.2.5 OPTION CASSETE ............................................................................................... 5-122

5.3 Adjustment ................................................................................................................... 5-136

5.3.1 Outline of printer registration adjustment .............................................................. 5-136

5.3.2 Printer registration mode ....................................................................................... 5-136

5.3.3 Registration adjustment......................................................................................... 5-139

5.3.4 Zoom adjustment ................................................................................................... 5-144

5.3.5 Separation pressure adjustment ........................................................................... 5-148

5.3.6 ADF skew adjustment ........................................................................................... 5-149

5.3.7 Drum ATDC adjustment ........................................................................................ 5-150

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-2

5.1 Maintenance schedule

Scanning Section

Parts NameMaintenance Cycle (pages)

QTY Reference PageClean Replace

Roller Separator *1 50,000 or

3 years1 5-34

Piece Separator *1 50,000 or2 years 1 5-46

Contact glass & Pane *2Clean when

dirty1 5-48, 49

Sheet document press

(White sheet) *2

Clean whendirty

1 5-65

Exposure Lamp *2 1,000 hours 1 5-50

Roller Feed 100,000 1 5-41

Roller Exit 100,000 1 5-40

*1 Replace these parts at the same time.

*2 It is not a maintenance parts. However, please replace when they do not work.

Printer Section



Roller Retard 100,000 1 5-109

Roller Feed 100,000 1

Roller Separator / Roller Pickup 100,000 1 5-112

Roller Pickup 100,000 1 5-95

Pad Pressure MP 100,000 1 5-97

Roller Register 100,000 1 5-93

Roller Exit A, B 100,000 1 5-88, 89

Fuser Unit 100,000 1 5-85

Ozone Filter 150,000 1 5-120

Case dust (Molt plan) 150,000 1 5-121

Developing Section



Drum cartridge 100,000 1

See OperatingInstructions

Toner cartridge A 10,000

Toner cartridge B 20,000 1

LED print head 1

Note: “” means to clean the mechanism when a paper take-up or transport failure or print quality

problems occurs.

Note: The maintenance cycle (pages or years) may be shorter than the above value according to theenvironment or usage of the machine, and the documents and paper that are used. The mainte-nance cycle (pages or years) are not insured and early replacement of the parts may be neededto maintain the machine quality.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-3

5.2 Re/DisassembleBefore disassembling, disconnect the power cord and line cord.

5.2.1 COVERS ................................................................................................................... 5-5PLATE PRINTER B ........................................................................................................ 5-6COVER PLATEN ........................................................................................................... 5-6COVER TX SIDE B ........................................................................................................ 5-7COVER TX SIDE F ........................................................................................................ 5-8GUIDE OUTER .............................................................................................................. 5-9COVER LEFT TOP ........................................................................................................ 5-9COVER RIGHT TOP .................................................................................................... 5-10COVER FRONT UPPER .............................................................................................. 5-11COVER BACK TOP ..................................................................................................... 5-12PLATE PRINTER A ...................................................................................................... 5-13COVER L ..................................................................................................................... 5-13COVER SIDE R ........................................................................................................... 5-14COVER BACK SIDE .................................................................................................... 5-14COVER TRAY .............................................................................................................. 5-15COVER SPEAKER ...................................................................................................... 5-16

5.2.2 PCBS ....................................................................................................................... 5-17PCB ADF ...................................................................................................................... 5-18PCB PANEL A / PANEL B ........................................................................................... 5-19LCD .............................................................................................................................. 5-20PCB CONN MOT ......................................................................................................... 5-22PCB LPH ...................................................................................................................... 5-23PCB CCD ..................................................................................................................... 5-24PCB INVERTER ........................................................................................................... 5-25PCB MAIN .................................................................................................................... 5-26PCB VOICE .................................................................................................................. 5-26PCB NCU ..................................................................................................................... 5-27PCB PRT ...................................................................................................................... 5-28PCB SCANNER ........................................................................................................... 5-28PCB PSU HV ............................................................................................................... 5-29PCB PSU ..................................................................................................................... 5-29PCB BPSIZE ................................................................................................................ 5-30

5.2.3 SCANNING SECTION ............................................................................................ 5-31TRAY DOCUMENT ...................................................................................................... 5-31SENSOR (DL1) ............................................................................................................ 5-32SENSOR (DW1) / SENSOR (DW2) ............................................................................. 5-33ROLLER SEPARATOR ................................................................................................ 5-34ROLLER PRESS .......................................................................................................... 5-35GUIDE INNER .............................................................................................................. 5-36FRAME MOTOR .......................................................................................................... 5-37CLUTCH (MG) ............................................................................................................. 5-38CLUTCH (CL) ............................................................................................................... 5-39ROLLER EXIT .............................................................................................................. 5-40ROLLER FEED ............................................................................................................ 5-41SENSOR (DS1) ............................................................................................................ 5-43

SENSOR (TXIL) ........................................................................................................... 5-44SENSOR (DS2) / SENSOR (DRS) .............................................................................. 5-45PIECE SEPARATOR ................................................................................................... 5-46HINGE .......................................................................................................................... 5-47CONTACT GLASS ....................................................................................................... 5-48PANE ........................................................................................................................... 5-49LAMP ........................................................................................................................... 5-50CARRIAGE A ............................................................................................................... 5-51MIRROR A ................................................................................................................... 5-54CARRIAGE B ............................................................................................................... 5-55MIRROR B / MIRROR C .............................................................................................. 5-57MIRROR CARRIAGE ALIGNMENT ............................................................................. 5-58SENSOR (HOME) ........................................................................................................ 5-60SENSOR (BSS) ........................................................................................................... 5-61FBS MOTOR ................................................................................................................ 5-62SENSOR (APS) / SENSOR (BIS) ................................................................................ 5-64SHEET DOCUMENT PRESS ...................................................................................... 5-65FRAME SCANNER ...................................................................................................... 5-66

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-4

5.2.4 PRINTER SECTION ................................................................................................ 5-68TRAY MP ..................................................................................................................... 5-68COVER JAM ACCESS ................................................................................................ 5-69ROLLER TRANSFER .................................................................................................. 5-70ROLLER FEED DUPLEX A ......................................................................................... 5-71SENSOR (DUP) ........................................................................................................... 5-73SENSOR (J1-OP) ........................................................................................................ 5-74MOTOR 1 ..................................................................................................................... 5-75MOTOR 2 ..................................................................................................................... 5-75

CLUTCH (PAPER REGIST) ......................................................................................... 5-76CLUTCH (PAPER FEED) ............................................................................................ 5-77PCB DUPLEX .............................................................................................................. 5-78FRAME DRIVE UNIT DUPLEX .................................................................................... 5-78MOTOR (Dupex) .......................................................................................................... 5-79CLUTCH (Duplex) ........................................................................................................ 5-79SENSOR (THRM) ........................................................................................................ 5-80FRAME DRIVE A ......................................................................................................... 5-81SPEAKER .................................................................................................................... 5-83SENSOR (INTERLOCK) .............................................................................................. 5-84FUSER UNIT ................................................................................................................ 5-85EXIT ASSY ................................................................................................................... 5-86ROLLER EXIT A .......................................................................................................... 5-88ROLLER EXIT B .......................................................................................................... 5-89

SENSOR (SWBK) ........................................................................................................ 5-90SENSOR (PDS) ........................................................................................................... 5-91LED .............................................................................................................................. 5-92ROLLER REGISTER ................................................................................................... 5-93ROLLER PICKUP ........................................................................................................ 5-95PAD PRESSURE MP ................................................................................................... 5-97SENSOR (PES BS) ...................................................................................................... 5-98SENSOR (PSS) ........................................................................................................... 5-99SOLENOID ................................................................................................................. 5-100FAN ............................................................................................................................ 5-101CLUTCH (SCREW) .................................................................................................... 5-102MOTOR (DC) ............................................................................................................. 5-104SENSOR (TOS) ......................................................................................................... 5-105

SENSOR (CART) ....................................................................................................... 5-108ROLLER RETARD ..................................................................................................... 5-109ROLLER PICKUP / ROLLER SEPARATE ................................................................. 5-112REMOVING THE ROLLER SEPARATE .................................................................... 5-113REMOVING THE ROLLER PICKUP .......................................................................... 5-114SENSOR (PES) ......................................................................................................... 5-115SENSOR (LIFT UP) ................................................................................................... 5-116SENSOR (PSIZE) ...................................................................................................... 5-117ROLLER FEED .......................................................................................................... 5-118FILTER OZONE ......................................................................................................... 5-120CASE DUST ............................................................................................................... 5-121

5.2.5 OPTION CASSETE ............................................................................................... 5-122COVER REAR ........................................................................................................... 5-122

PCB CASSETTE ........................................................................................................ 5-122MOTOR ...................................................................................................................... 5-123MOTOR BRACKET .................................................................................................... 5-123CLUTCH ..................................................................................................................... 5-124FRAME DRIVE ........................................................................................................... 5-124SHAFT ROLLER FEED ............................................................................................. 5-125ROLLER RETARD ..................................................................................................... 5-126ROLLER PICKUP / ROLLER SEPARATE ................................................................. 5-129REMOVING THE ROLLER SEPARATOR ................................................................. 5-130REMOVING THE ROLLER PICKUP .......................................................................... 5-131SENSOR (PES) ......................................................................................................... 5-132SENSOR (LIFT UP) ................................................................................................... 5-133SENSOR (FEED) ....................................................................................................... 5-134SENSOR (J-OP) ....................................................................................................... 5-134

SENSOR (PSIZE) ...................................................................................................... 5-135

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-5

5.2.1 COVERS

Cover platen

(Page5-6)

Cover back top

(Page5-12)

Plate printer B

(Page5-6)

Cover TX side B

(Page5-7)

Guide outer

(Page5-8)Tray document

Cover TX side F

(Page5-8)

Cover left top

(Page5-9)

Cover panel top

(Page5-11)

Cover speaker

(Page5-16)

Cover front upper

(Page5-11)

Cover right top

(Page5-10)

Cover tray

(Page5-15)Cover L

(Page5-13)

Cover side L sub

(Page5-13)

Plate printer A

(Page5-13)

Cover side R

(Page5-14)

Cover back side

(Page5-14)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-6

PLATE PRINTER B

1) Remove one Plate printer B mounting screw and then remove the PLATE PRINTER B.

2) Disconnect the connector from the PCB SCANNER.

Plate printer B

PCB scanner

ADG011)

Ground wire

NOTE: When mounting the Plate printer B, pay attention not to allow the Plate printer B to pinch theHarness.

COVER PLATEN

1) Remove the Plate printer B. Page 5-6

2) Open the Cover platen.

3) Raise the Cover platen, incline it, release the hinge tab, and then remove the COVER PLATEN.

Cover platen

Hinge

Tab

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-7

COVER TX SIDE B


2) Remove two Cover TX side B mounting screws.

AFF01

2)

AFF01

2)

3) Close the Cover platen.

4) Open the Guide outer.

5) Release three locking tabs, and then remove the COVER TX SIDE B.

Cover TX side B

Guide outer

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-8

COVER TX SIDE F


2) Remove one Cover TX side F mounting screw.

AFF012)



5) Release the locking tab, and then remove the COVER TX SIDE F.

Cover TX side F

Guide outer

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-9

GUIDE OUTER

1) Remove the Cover TX side F. Page 5-8

2) Remove the GUDE OUTER.

Guide outer

COVER LEFT TOP


2) Remove two Cover left top mounting screws.

3) Raise the Cover left top, release the two locking tabs, and then remove the COVER LEFT TOP.

ADG042)

Cover left top

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-10

COVER RIGHT TOP


2) Remove two Cover right top mounting screws.

3) Raise the Cover right top, release the two locking tabs, and then remove the COVER RIGHT TOP.

ADG042)

Cover right top

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-11

COVER FRONT UPPER


2) Remove the Cover left top. Page 5-9

3) Remove the Cover right top. Page 5-10

4) Remove four caps and mounting screws.

5) Remove the Cover front upper together with the panel.

Cover panel top

Cover front upper Cap screw

ADG014)

6) Turn over the Cover front top, and then disconnect the connector.7) Remove three Cover front upper mounting screws at backside of the Panel top front, and then

remove the COVER FRONT UPPER.

Cover front upper

AFF017)

Cover panel top

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-12

COVER BACK TOP

1) Remove the Cover platen. Page 5-6



4) Remove three Cover size H mounting screws, and then remove the Cover size H.

Cover size H

ADG044)

5) Remove four Cover back top mounting screws, and then remove the COVER BACK TOP byspreading its right and left.

Cover back top

ADG044)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-13

PLATE PRINTER A

1) Remove the Plate printer B. Page 5-6

2) Remove eleven Plate printer A mounting screws, and then remove the PLATE PRINTER A.

Plate printer A

ADG01

2)

COVER L

1) Remove two Cover side L sub mounting screws, and then remove the Cover side L sub.

2) Remove five Cover L mounting screws, and then remove the COVER L.

Cover LCover side L sub

ADG04�1)

ADG04�2)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-14

COVER SIDE R

1) Remove three Cover side R mounting screws.

2) Release two tabs, and then remove the COVER SIDE R.

Cover side R

ADG041)

COVER BACK SIDE

1) Remove the Cover side R. Page 5-14

2) Remove three Cover back side mounting screws, and then remove the COVER BACK SIDE R.

Cover back side ADG04�

2)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-15

COVER TRAY

1) Remove the Cover L. Page 5-13

2) Remove two Cover tray upper mounting screws.

3) Release the locking tab, and then remove the Cover tray upper.

Cover tray upper

ADG04�

2)

4) Open the Cover front, and then remove the COVER TRAY.

Cover front

Cover tray

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-16

COVER SPEAKER

1) Open the Cover front and the Cover jam access.

2) Remove one Cover speaker mounting screw.

3) Release two tabs, and then remove the COVER SPEAKER.

ADG04�2)

Cover front

Cover speaker

Cover jam access

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-17

5.2.2 PCBS

PCB ADF

(Page5-18)

PCB Panel B

(Page5-19)

PCB Panel A

(Page5-19)

PCB CCD(Page5-24)

PCB Inverter

(Page5-25)

PCB LPH

(Page5-23)

PCB CONN MOT

(Page5-22)

PCB Scanner

(Page5-28)

PCB PRT

(Page5-28)

PCB NCU

(Page5-27)

PCB Main(Page5-26)

PCB Voice

(Page5-26)PCB PSU HV

(Page5-29)

PCB Bpsize

(Page5-30)

PCB Duplex (Option)

(Page5-78)

PCB PSU(Page5-29)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-18

PCB ADF

1) Remove the Cover TX side B. Page 5-7

2) Disconnect the seven connectors.

3) Remove two PCB ADF mounting screws, and then remove the PCB ADF.

PCB ADF

AFF013)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-19

PCB PANEL A / PANEL B



3) Remove the Cover front upper. Page 5-11

4) Remove the Panel top. Page 5-11

5) Remove ten PCB PANEL A / PANEL B mounting screws, and then remove the PCB panel A and

PCB panel B.

6) Remove the PCB PANEL A and the PCB PANEL B from the Panel top.

Cover panel top

PCB panel A

PCB panel B

AFF 015)

NOTE:The figure shows the panel being turned over.

7) Remove the PCB PANEL A and the PCB PANEL B.

PCB panel B

PCB panel A

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-20

LCD




4) Remove the Panel top. Page 5-11

5) Remove the PCB PANEL A. Page 5-19

6) Disconnect the connector, and then remove two Film harnesses.

7) Release three locking tabs, and then remove the LCD.

Assy LCD

PCB panel A

8) Spread the side of the Supporter LCD, slide and raise the LCD, and then remove the LCD.

LCD

Supporter LCD

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-21

NOTE: When mounting the Assy LCD, tuck the Film harness inside.

Assy LCD

PCB panel A

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-22

PCB CONN MOT




4) Remove the Cover back top. Page 5-12

5) Disconnect the connector.

6) Remove two PCB CONN MOT mounting screws, and then remove the PCB CONN MOT.

PCB CONN MOT

ADG01�6)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-23

PCB LPH

1) Remove the Cover side L sub. Page 5-13


3) Remove the Cover tray upper. Page 5-15

4) Remove the Cover tray. Page 5-15

5) Disconnect the connector, and then pull out the Harness.

6) Remove two Duct side mounting screws.

7) Remove two Duct side mounting projection, and then remove the Duct side.

Duct side

ADG04�6)

8) Remove two Case shield mounting screws, and then remove the Case shield.

9) Disconnect one connector, and then remove two Film harnesses.

NOTE: When removing the film harnesses, be sure to unlock them.

10) Remove two PCB LPH mounting screws, and then remove the PCB LPH.

PCB LPH

Case shild ADG01�

8)

ADG01�10)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-24

PCB CCD




4) Remove the Cover size H. Page 5-12

5) Remove the Contact glass. Page 5-48

6) Remove the Pane. Page 5-49

7) Remove three Cover scanner mounting screws, and then remove the Cover scanner.

ADG017)

Cover scanner

8) Remove the Film harness.

9) Remove two PCB CCD mounting screws, and then remove the PCB CCD.

ADG019)

PCB CCD

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-25

PCB INVERTER







7) Remove the Cover scanner. Page 5-24

8) Disconnect the two connectors.

9) Remove one Bracket inverter mounting screws, and then remove the Bracket PCB inverter.

ADG019)

Bracket inverter

10) Remove two Inverter mounting screws, and then remove the PCB INVERTER.

Bracket inverter

PCB Inverter

ADG01�10)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-26

PCB MAIN

1) Remove the Plate printer A. Page 5-13

2) Disconnect the connected from the PCB MAIN.

NOTE: Do not disconnect one connector (P22). (Otherwise, the backup memory is deleted.)

3) Remove five PCB MAIN mounting screws, and then remove the PCB MAIN.

PCB main

ADG01�3)

P22

NOTE: When replacing the PCB MAIN, disconnect all the connectors.

PCB VOICE


2) Remove two PCB VOICE mounting screws.

3) Remove one spacer, and then remove the PCB VOICE.

NOTE: Do not disconnect the connector.

ADG01�2)

PCB voice

NOTE: When replacing the PCB VOICE, disconnect the connectors from the PCB MAIN.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-27

PCB NCU



3) Remove two Bracket shield D mounting screws, and then remove the Bracket shield D.

Bracket shild D

ADG01�3)

4) Remove the PCB MAIN. Page 5-26

5) Disconnect all the connectors from the PCB NCU.

6) Remove one mounting screw, and then disconnect the Ground wire.

7) Remove three PCB NCU mounting screws, and then remove the PCB NCU.

PCB NCU

Ground wire

ADG01�

6)

ADG01�7)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-28

PCB PRT


2) Disconnect all the connectors from the PCB PRT.

3) Remove two PCB PRT mounting screws, and then remove the PCB PRT.

ADG01�3)

PCB PRT

PCB SCANNER


2) Disconnect all the connectors from the PCB SCANNER.

3) Remove two PCB SCANNER mounting screws, and then remove the PCB SCANNER.

ADG01�3)

PCB scanner

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-29

PCB PSU HV


2) Remove four PCB PSU HV mounting screws, and then remove the PCB PSU HV.

3) Disconnect the three connectors.

PCB PSU HV

ADG01�2)

PCB PSU

1) Remove the Cover left. Page 5-13


3) Remove two PCB PSU mounting screws, and then pull out the PCB PSU.

4) Disconnect the three connectors.

PCB PSU

ADG01�

3)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-30

PCB BPSIZE

1) Remove the Tray MP. Page 5-68

2) Remove two the Tray A-2 MP mounting screws.

3) Release the locking tabs, and then remove the Tray A-2 MP.

4) Remove two PCB BPSIZE mounting screws, and then remove the PCB BPSIZE.


6) Remove the Knob dial.

Tray A-2 MP

Knob dial

PCB bpsize

AFF012)

AFF064)

NOTE: When mounting the Knob dial, fit the Knob dial projection in the groove of the PCB BPSIZE.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-31

5.2.3 SCANNING SECTION

TRAY DOCUMENT



3) Remove one connector.

4) Raise the Tray document.

Tray document

5) Pass the connector vertically through the Platen cover hole, and then remove the TRAY

DOCUMENT.

Tray document

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-32

SENSOR (DL1)

1) Remove the Tray document. Page 5-31

2) Turn over the Tray document, remove three mounting screws, release five locking tabs, and thenremove the Tray document B.

AFF01

2)

Tray document B

Tray document A

3) Disconnect the connector, and then remove the SENSOR (DL1).

Sensor (DL1)

NOTE: When mounting the Sensor, pay attention to its mounting direction.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-33

SENSOR (DW1) / SENSOR (DW2)

1) Remove the Tray document. Page 5-31

2) Remove the Tray document B. Page 5-32 Procedure 2

3) Remove the Sensor stoppers.

4) Disconnect the connectors, and then remove the SENSOR (DW1)/SENSOR (DW2).

Sensor (DW1)

Sensor stopper

Sensor stopper

Sensor (DW2)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-34

ROLLER SEPARATOR

1) Remove the Guide outer. Page 5-8

2) Remove five Guide outer mounting screws, and the remove the Guide outer A.

Roller separator

Guide outer A

AFF012)

3) Remove five E-rings of the Roller separator, and then remove the gear and bearings.

Gear 27 0.8 D

Bearing D63)

Bearing D63)

Bearing D6 83)

ANB033)

ANB033)

ANB033)

ANB023)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-35

4) Slide the Roller separator, and then remove the ROLLER SEPARATOR.

Roller separater

ROLLER PRESS1) Remove the Guide outer A. Page 5-34 Procedure 2

2) Remove one Holder register mounting screw, and then remove the Holder register.

3) Remove the ROLLER PRESS.

Holder register

Roller press B AFF01

2)

NOTE: When mounting the Roller press, pay attention to the shaft mounting direction.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-36

GUIDE INNER

1) Open the Cover platen, and then remove one screw.

ADG011)





6) Disconnect the four connectors.

7) Remove four Guide inner mounting screws, and then remove the GUIDE INNER.

AFF017)

Guide inner

AFF01

7)

AFF017)

Ground wire

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-37

FRAME MOTOR





5) Remove the Guide inner. Page 5-36

6) Remove the clamp, remove one Plate drive mounting screw, and then remove the Plate drive.

7) Remove three Frame motor mounting screws, and then remove the FRAME MOTOR.

Plate drive ADG04

6)

ADG017)

ADG017)

ADG017)

Clamp

Flame motor

Cltch(MG)

8) Remove one Sensor mounting screw, and then remove the Sensor.

9) Remove the E-ring and gears.

ADG018)

Sensor (TXIL)

Gear 34/75

Gear 28/36

ANB029)

Flame motor

NOTE: Mount the Plate drive in position after mounting the Guide inner to the Cover platen

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-38

CLUTCH (MG)






6) Remove the Frame motor. Page 5-37

7) Remove the CLUTCH (MG).


9) Remove the plastic ring, and then remove the shaft.

AVA019)

Bearing D6

Bearing D6

Shaft clutch A

Clutch (MG)

Gear 15 0.5 D

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-39

CLUTCH (CL)







7) Remove the plastic ring, and then remove the CLUTCH (CL).


Clutch (CL)

AVA017)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-40

ROLLER EXIT







7) Remove the Clutch (MG). Page 5-38

8) Remove three Spring P earth mounting screws, and the remove the Spring P earth.

Spring P earth

AFF018)

9) Remove the E-ring, and then remove the bearings.

10) Remove the ROLLER EXIT.

11) Remove the E-ring, and then remove the gear and bearings.

Roller exit

Gear 37 0.5 D

ANB039)

ANB0211)

Bearing D611)

Bearing D69)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-41

ROLLER FEED







7) Remove the Clutch (MG) and Clutch (CL). Page 5-38, 5-39

8) Remove the Spring P earth. Page 5-40

9) Remove the Plate document press.

10) Remove the E-ring, and then remove the bearing.

Plate document press

ANB03

10)

Bearing10)

11) Remove the gear, and then remove the pin.

12) Remove the E-ring, and then remove the bearing.

Gear 76 0.5

AQA0411)

Bearing12) AVA02

12)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-42

13) Remove four Frame drive mounting screws, and then remove the Frame drive.

14) Remove the ROLLER FEED.

Frame drive

Roller feed

AFF0113)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-43

SENSOR (DS1)


2) Remove one Sensor (DS1) mounting screw, and then remove the SENSOR (DS1).


Sensor (DS1)

ADG012)

4) Remove the Sensor stopper, and then remove the SENSOR.

Sensor (DS1)

Plate sensor

Sensor stopper

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-44

SENSOR (TXIL)


2) Remove one Plate sensor open mounting screw, and then remove the Plate sensor open.


ADG012)

Plate sensor open


Sensor (TXIL)

Plate sensor open

Sensor stopper

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-45

SENSOR (DS2) / SENSOR (DRS)


2) Remove two Sensor cover mounting screws.

3) Remove the Cover sensor.

NOTE: Put a small screwdriver into the center and remove the Cover sensor.

Cover sensor

AFF012)

4) Remove each one of Sensor (DS2)/Sensor (DRS) mounting screws, and then remove the SENSOR(DS2)/SENSOR (DRS).

5) Disconnect the connectors.

AFF012)

AFF012)

Sensor (DS2)

Sensor (DRS)

6) Remove the Sensor stopper, and then remove the SENSOR (DS2)/SENSOR (DRS).

Sensor (DS2)

Plate sensor DS2

Sensor stopper

Sensor (DRS)

Plate sensor DRS

Sensor stopper

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-46

PIECE SEPARATOR


2) Release two locking tabs, and then remove the PIECE SEPARATOR.

Piece separator

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-47

HINGE


2) Remove three Hinge mounting screws, and then remove the HINGE.

AHB012)

AHB012)

Hinge (L)

Hinge (R)

NOTE: When mounting the Hinges, pay attention to the mounting position.

Mount the Hinge (L) in a position where the Hinge comes in contact with the Cover platen.

Align the Hinge (R) with the graduation and the Cover platen graduation.

Hinge (L) Hinge (R)

NOTE: Cover platen angle can be adjusted with the position of the Hinge (R) graduation.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-49

PANE





5) Remove the Cover size V.

6) Remove the PANE.

Pane

Cover size V

NOTE: Handle the fragile Pane with due care.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-51

CARRIAGE A

1) Open the Cover platen. Page 5-6







8) Remove the Blind sheet. Page 5-50

9) Disconnect the connector from between the FPC harness and the Inverter.

10) Remove one FPC harness mounting screw, and then remove the FPC harness.

Inverter

Assy Lamp-CBL

AFF01�

10)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-52


12) Move the Carriage to the replacing position (notch).

13) Tuck the tab of the Guide FPC center inside, and then raise the Guide FPC out of position.

14) Pull out the FPC harness from the Carriage B hole.

Guide FPCFPC harness

NOTE: When puling out the FPC harness from the Carriage hole, pay attention not to damage thefilm.

15) Put a screwdriver into the hole at the right side of the replacing position, and then remove thescrew at the center of the Holder belt AB.

16) Remove the screw at the center of the Holder belt AF.

Holder belt AB

AEH0115)

Holder belt AF

AEH0116)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-53

17) Remove the Belt from the locking tabs of the Holder belt AB and the Holder belt AF.

Holder belt ABHolder belt AF

BeltBelt

18) Move the Carriage A askew, and then remove the CARRIAGE A.

Carriage A

NOTE: Magnets are attached at the both ends of the Carriage A.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-54

MIRROR A









9) Remove the Lamp. Page 5-50

10) Remove the Carriage A. Page 5-51

11) Remove the Clamp mirrors AB, AF.

12) Remove the MIRROR A.

Mirror A

Clamp mirror AB

Clamp mirror AF

NOTE: Pull out the Clamp mirror by pulling the spring to the Mirror side.

NOTE: Mount the Mirror A so that its surface faces upwards and the side C downwards.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-55

CARRIAGE B










10) Remove two Holder belt B mounting screws.

Holder belt BCarriage B

Holder belt B

ADG01�10)

11) Remove the Belts from the Holder belt B locking tabs.

Holder belt B Holder belt B

BeltBelt

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-56

12) Move the Carriage B askew, and then remove the CARRIAGE B.

Carriage B

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-57

MIRROR B / MIRROR C










10) Remove the Carriage B. Page 5-55

11) Remove the four Clamp mirrors B.

Clamp mirror B

Clamp mirror B

Lot number

Lot number

Mirror C

Mirror B

NOTE: When mounting the Mirrors, pay attention to their top and bottom faces. The face markedwith lot number is the bottom side. (The face without mark is the top side.)

NOTE: Pay attention to the mounting position.

Mirror B comes on the upper side.

Mirror C comes on the lower side. (The Mirror C is 2 mm larger than the Mirror.)

Mount the mirrors so that their surfaces face each other as shown in the figure.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-58

MIRROR CARRIAGE ALIGNMENT

1) Put the Carriage A askew in the Frame scanner, and then move it to the replacing position (notch).

2) Put the Belt through the Holder belt AF and the Holder belt AB, and then lock it temporarily.

Holder belt ABHolder belt AF

Frame scanner

AFF01�2)

3) Move the Carriage A to the position where the projections of its both ends come in contact with theright side inner wall of the chassis.

4) Put the Carriage B askew in the Frame scanner.

Holder belt B

Holder belt B

Frame scaner

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-59

5) To mount the Carriage A, put a screwdriver in the Frame scanner’s right-side holes and tighten theHolder belt AF and Holder belt AB mounting screws.

6) Tighten the Holder belt B of the Carriage B.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-60

SENSOR (HOME)








8) Remove the Cover front lower. Page 5-66


10) Remove the Sensor (Home) stopper, and the remove the SENSOR (HOME).

Sensor stopper Sensor (Home)

Carriage A

NOTE: When carrying out the work, manually move the Carriage A to the center.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-61

SENSOR (BSS)







7) Remove one Sensor (BSS) mounting screw.

8) Disconnect the connector, and then remove the SENSOR (BSS).

Sensor (BSS)

AFF017)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-62

FBS MOTOR





5) Remove four Bracket hinge R mounting screws, and then remove the Bracket hinge R.

6) Remove the Harness from the Bracket hinge R clamp, and then disconnect the connector.

Bracket hinge R ADG04�

5)

7) Remove the Spring.

8) Remove three Bracket motor mounting screws, and then remove the Bracket motor.

Bracket motor

Spring C tension A ADG04�

8)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-63

9) Remove two Bracket motor mounting screws, and then remove the FBS MOTOR.

Motor Bracket motor

AJD029)

NOTE: Mount the Bracket motor temporarily by screws. Apply the Spring in position and tighten upthe screws.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-64

SENSOR (APS) / SENSOR (BIS)





5) Remove four Bracket hinge R mounting screws, and then remove the Bracket hinge R.


Bracket hinge L

Red

Brown

ADG045)

7) Remove the Sensor (APS)/ Sensor (BIS) stopper, and then remove the Sensor (APS)/ Sensor

(BIS).

Sensor (BIS)

Sensor (APS)

Sensor stopper

Sensor stopper

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-65

SHEET DOCUMENT PRESS


2) Remove the release coated paper of the double-adhesive tape of the Sheet document press.

3) Put the Sheet document press on the panel with its adhesive side facing up.

4) Place the Sheet document press 1 mm away from the document reference position.


6) Open the Cover platen, and then apply the Sheet document press firmly.

1mm

1mm


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-66

FRAME SCANNER





5) Remove three Cover front lower screws, and then release three Cover front lower locking tabs.

6) Release one right locking tab, and then remove the Cover front lower.

NOTE: Mount the Cover front lower in the reverse order.

7) Remove two mounting screws.

Cover front lower

ADG01�5)

ADG03�7)

8) Remove the Plate printer B. (Only the ADF specification. Page 5-6)


10) Disconnect the five connectors from the PCB SCANNER, and then remove one film harness.

PCB scanner

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-67

11) Remove two Frame scanner mounting screws, and then remove the FRAME SCANNER.

ADG01�11)

Frame scanner

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-68

5.2.4 PRINTER SECTION

TRAY MP



3) Remove two mounting screws.

4) Release two locking tabs, and then remove the Piece B and Piece F.

5) Remove the TRAY MP.

Pice B

Tray MP

Pice F

AFF013)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-69

COVER JAM ACCESS



3) Remove two screws, and Cover Cam F and Cover Cam B.

Cover cam B

Cover cam F

4) Remove two screws, and then disconnect the Ground wire.

5) Open the Cover jam access.

6) Remove two knob lock jacks, and then remove the COVER JAM ACCESS.

Knob lock JAC

Knob lock JAC

Cover jam acsses

Knob lock JAC

ADG01�3)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-70

ROLLER TRANSFER


2) Release four locking tabs, and then remove the Guide transfer B.

Guide transfer B

3) Remove the Cover bracket TF.

4) Release the locking tabs, and then remove the Bracket transfer B and the Bracket transfer A.

5) Remove the ROLLER TRANSFER.

6) Remove the Roller gap B and the Bracket transfer B.

7) Remove the gear, the Roller gap A and the Bracket transfer F.

Cover bracket TF

Bracket transfer B

Roller gap B

Roller gap A

Gear 25H 0.6

Bracket transfer F

Roller transfer

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-71

ROLLER FEED DUPLEX A


2) Remove four Guide transfer mounting screws, and then remove Guide transfer.

Guide duplex Assy AFA073)

3) Remove four Guide duplex Assy mounting screws, and then remove the Guide duplex Assy.

Guide transfer

AFF012)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-72

4) Remove the belt.

5) Remove two plastic rings, and then remove the Flange pulleys and the gears.

6) Remove two plastic rings.

7) Remove four bearings, and then remove the ROLLER FEED DUPLEX.

Frange pulley

Frange pulley AVA01

5)

AVA016)

AVA015)

Belt

Gear 20/25P

Gear 20/25P

Bearing

BearingRoller feed duplex A

Bearing

Bearing

NOTE: When mounting the Roller feed duplex, pass the bearings over the springs.

Bearing Bearing

Spring T FG duplex

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-73

SENSOR (DUP)


2) Remove the Guide transfer. Page 5-71

3) Remove the Guide duplex Assy. Page 5-71) Remove the Sensor stopper, and then remove theSENSOR.


Sensor (DUP)

Sensor stopper

Guide duplex Assy

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-74

SENSOR (J1-OP)

1) Remove the Plate printer A.


3) Remove the PCB DUPLEX. (Only the DUPLEX specification. Page 5-78)

4) Remove one Bracket sensor jack mounting screw, and then remove the Bracket sensor jack.


Bracket sensor jac

ADG01�2)


Sensor (J1-OP)

Sensor stopper

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-75

MOTOR 1



3) Remove four Motor 1 mounting screws, and then remove the Motor 1.

Motor 1

AJD01�3)

MOTOR 2

1) Remove the Plate printer A. Page 5-13Remove the Plate printer A. Page 5-13


3) Remove four Motor 2 mounting screws, and then remove the Motor 2.

Motor 2

AJD01�3)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-76

CLUTCH (PAPER REGIST)


2) Remove the PCB PSU HV. Page 5-29


4) Remove three Motor bracket mounting screws, and then remove the Motor bracket.

Motor bracket

ADG01�4)

5) Remove the plastic ring, and then remove the CLUTCH.


Clutch

AVA026)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-77

CLUTCH (PAPER FEED)



3) Remove the Motor bracket. Page 5-123



Clutch

AVA01�5)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-78

PCB DUPLEX


2) Disconnect all the connectors from the PCB DUPLEX.

3) Remove two PCB DUPLEX mounting screws, and then remove the PCB DUPLEX.

PCB duplex

ADG01�3)

FRAME DRIVE UNIT DUPLEX



3) Remove the PCB DUPLEX. Page 5-78

4) Remove three Frame drive unit duplex mounting screws, and then remove the FRAME DRIVE

UNIT DUPLEX.

Frame drive unit duplex

PCB duplex

ADG01�4)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-79

MOTOR (Dupex)

NOTE: The Motor can be removed with the Frame drive unit duplex being mounted to the machine.



3) Remove two Motor mounting screws, and then remove the MOTOR.

Motor

ACE013)

CLUTCH (Duplex)

NOTE: The Clutch can be removed with the Frame drive unit duplex being mounted to the machine.



3) Remove one Bracket mounting screw, and then remove the Bracket and bearing.

4) Remove the CLUTCH.

Clutch

Bearing

Bracket ADG01

3)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-80

SENSOR (THRM)

1) Remove the Cover printer A. Page 5-13


3) Remove one Sensor mounting screw, and then remove the SENSOR.


Sensor (THRM)

AFF01�3)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-81

FRAME DRIVE A


2) Remove the PCB DUPLEX, and then remove Frame drive unit duplex.

(Only the DUPLEX specification. Page5-78)

3) Remove the Motor 1. Page 5-75

4) Remove the Motor 2. Page 5-75Remove the Motor 2. Page 5-75



7) Remove the Clutch (paper regist). Page 5-76

8) Remove the Clutch (paper feed). Page 5-77

9) Remove two Cover PCB HV mounting screws, and then remove the Cover PCB.


NOTE: When removing the Cover PCB HV, pay attention not to allow the spring to drop and getlost.

Cover PCB HV

Spring

ADG04�9)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-82

11) Remove the plastic ring, and then remove the Flange.

12) Remove the belt.

Belt

Frange

AVA02�11)

13) Remove one plastic ring.

14) Remove six Frame drive A mounting screws, and then remove the FRAME DRIVE A.

15) Remove the bearing.

Drive A assy

Bearing

AVA02�13)

ADG01�14)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-83

SPEAKER

1) Remove the Cover speaker. Page 5-16

2) Remove one Holder speaker mounting screw, and then remove the Holder speaker.


Holder speaker

ADG04�2)

4) Remove two Holder mounting screws, and then remove the Holder.

5) Remove the SPEAKER.

Holder

Speaker

AFF014)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-84

SENSOR (INTERLOCK)


2) Remove the Speaker. Page 5-83


4) Remove one screw.

5) Release one locking tab, and then remove the Holder IL.

Holder IL

ADG044)

6) Release two locking tabs, and then remove the Plate sensor IL.

7) Remove the SENSOR.

Plate sensor IL

Sensor (Inter lock)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-85

FUSER UNIT


2) Remove two Fuser unit mounting screws.

3) Open the Cover guide exit, and then remove the FUSER UNIT.

Fuser unit

Cover guide exit

ABF02�2)

ABF02�2)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-86

EXIT ASSY



3) Remove the Holdert speaker. Page 5-8

4) Remove three screws.

AFF014)

ADG014)

F. G. wire


6) Remove the PCB DUPLEX, and then Frame drive unit duplex.

(Only the DUPLEX specification. Page 5-78)

7) Remove the Frame drive unit duplex.

AFF01�

7)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-87


9) Remove the Cover back side. Page 5-14

10) Remove one Cover speaker back mounting screw, and then remove the Cover speaker back.

Cover speaker back

ADG04�10)

11) Open the Cover guide exit, and then remove three Exit Assy mounting screws.

12) Remove the EXIT ASSY.

Exit Assy

ADG04�11)

Cover guide exit

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-88

ROLLER EXIT A

1) Remove the Exit Assy. Page 5-87

2) Remove one screw, and then disconnect the Ground wire.

3) Remove one screw, and then remove the Plate terminal and the Spring P.

Spring p FG resister

F. G. wire

Plate terminal

Exit Assy

AFF06�2)

AFF01�3)

4) Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the Bearing.

5) Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the Gear clutch.


7) Remove the ROLLER EXIT A.

AVA014)

AVA01�6)

AVA04�5)

Bearing

Bearing

Gear clutch

Roller exit A

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-89

ROLLER EXIT B

1) Remove the Exit Assy. Page 5-87Remove the Exit Assy. Page 5-87

2) Disconnect the Ground wire. Page 5-69

3) Remove the Plate terminal and the Spring P. Page 5-88


5) Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the Gear.

6) Remove the Bearing.

7) Remove the ROLLER EXIT B.

Roller exit B

Bearing

AVA01�4)

AVA045)

Bearing

Gear 20

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-90

SENSOR (SWBK)




4) Release two locking tabs, and then remove the Bracket sensor.

Bracket sensor

5) Remove the Sensor plate, and then remove the SENSOR.


Sensor (SWBK)

Sensor stopper

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-91

SENSOR (PDS)

1) Remove the Cover side L sub. Page 5-13Remove the Cover side L sub. Page 5-13



4) Release the locking tabs, and then remove the Bracket sensor.

Bracket sensor

5) Remove the Sensor plate, and then remove the SENSOR.


Sensor (PDS)

Sensor stopper

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-92

LED

1) Open the Cover front.


3) Return the Knob, and then pull out the LED unit.

4) Release two locking tabs, and then remove the LED.

Knob LED

LED

LED unit

5) Remove two Film harnesses.

NOTE: When removing the Film harnesses, unlock them.

Harness

LED

Plate FG LED Plate FG LED

NOTE: Mount the LED so that the Plate FG LED would touch the inside wall of the LED. Otherwiseit may be damaged.

LED

Plate FG LED

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-93

ROLLER REGISTER


2) Remove the Frame drive unit Duplex. (Only the DUPLEX specification. Page 5-78)

3) Remove the Frame drive A. Page 5-81

4) Remove one screw, and then remove the Spring P.

5) Remove the Spring C (yellow).

Spring C resister rear

Spring P FG resister

ADG01�4)

6) Remove the right Bearing regist D8.

7) Remove the left Bearing regist D8, and then remove the Regist Assy.

Regist AssyBearing regist D8

Bearing regist D8

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-94

8) Remove the two Bearing regist D8’s.

9) Remove the gear.

10) Remove the Knob lever regist and the Knob lever regist B.

11) Remove the E-ring.

12) Remove the Guide paper.

Bearing regist D8

Roller regist

Guide paper

Knob lever regist

Knob lever regist B

Gear 16 regist

ANB0511)

Bearing regist D8

Spring C resister front

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-95

ROLLER PICKUP




4) Remove the Cover jam access. Page 5-69

5) Remove two MP guide Assy mounting screws, and then remove the MP guide Assy.

MP guide Assy

ADG015)

6) Remove the Bracket shaft MP (F) and the Bearing.


8) Remove the Bearing, and then remove the Roller pickup MP.

9) Remove the Cam flapper MP.

Bracket shaft MP F

Bearing

Bearing

Roller pickup MP

AVA017)

Cam flapper MP

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-96

10) Remove the E-ring, and then remove the Roller.

Roller

ANA0710)

NOTE: When mounting the Roller, pay attention to the mounting direction.

When the Roller is turned clockwise, it is locked. (The Shaft turns.)

When the Roller is turned counterclockwise, it is unlocked. (The Shaft does not turn.)

Roller

Shaft

FREE

LOCK

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-97

PAD PRESSURE MP





5) Remove the MP guide Assy. Page 5-95

6) Remove the PAD PRESSURE MP.

Pad pressure MP

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-98

SENSOR (PES BS)





5) Release two hooks, and then remove the Flapper MP.

NOTE: Raise the Flapper MP and then release the hooks.

Flapper MP



Sensor stopper

Sensor (PES BS)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-99

SENSOR (PSS)


2) Remove one Bracket PSS mounting screw.

3) Hold up the Guide paper and the Feeler PSS, and then remove the Bracket PSS.


Bracket PSS

Feeler PSS

ADG04�2)

Guide paper


Sensor (PSS)

Sensor stopper

NOTE: When mounting the Sensor, pay attention not to allow the Feeler PSS to touch the wire

Harness.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-100

SOLENOID



3) Remove one Bracket solenoid mounting screw, and then remove the Bracket solenoid.

4) Pull out one connector.

5) Remove the Harness from the clamp, and then pull it out through the hole.

ADG01�3)

Bracket solenoid MP

6) Remove one Solenoid mounting screw, and then remove the SOLENOID.

ADG016)

Solenoid

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-101

FAN




4) Remove the Filter ozone.


6) Release two locking tabs, and then remove the FAN.

Filter ozone

Fan

7) Remove the Holder fan.

Fan

Holder fan

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-102

CLUTCH (SCREW)



3) Remove the Bracket shield D. Page 5-27


5) Remove the PCB VOICE. Page 5-26

6) Remove the PCB NCU. Page 5-27

7) Remove one Bracket connector mounting screw, and then remove the Bracket connector.

Bracket connector

ADG01�7)

8) Remove six Case shield mounting screws, and then remove the Case shield.

Case shilde

ADG01�8)

.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-103



11) Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the CLUTCH.

Clutch

Gear 20/40

AVA01

11)

AVA019)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-104

MOTOR (DC)







7) Remove the Bracket connector. Page 5-102

8) Remove the Case shield. Page 5-102

9) Disconnect one connector.

10) Remove three Motor mounting screws, and then remove the MOTOR.

Motor (DC)

ABF0510)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-105

SENSOR (TOS)







7) Remove the Bracket connector. Page 5-102

8) Remove the Case shield. Page 5-102

9) Remove the Clutch (screw). Page 5-103 Procedure 11


11) Remove the Bearing.

12) Remove two plastic rings, and then remove two Pulley guides.

13) Remove the belt.

14) Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the Pulley gear.15) Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the bearing.

AVA01�12)

AVA01�14)

AVA01�10)

AVA01�15)

Pulley gear 32/60

Gear 32 0.8 onewayBearing

Bearing

Pulley guide

Pulley guide

AVA01�12)

NOTE: When mounting the Gear which was removed in 10, pay attention to the mounting direction.

When the Gear is turned clockwise, it is locked. When turned counterclockwise, it is unlocked.

FREE LOCK

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-106

16) Remove six Frame drive mounting screws, and then remove the Frame drive F.

ADG01�16)

Frame drive F

AFF01�16)

ADG01�16)

17) Remove four Chassis pillar mounting screws, and then remove the Chassis pillar.

NOTE: There is no need to remove the harness.

Chassis pillar

ADG01�17)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-107

18) Remove four Hopper Assy mounting screws, and then remove the Hopper Assy.

Hopper Assy

ADG04�18)

19) Remove one Bracket mounting screw, and then remove the Bracket enpty.


Bracket enpty AFF01�19)

21) Remove two Sensor mounting screws, and the remove the SENSOR.

Sensor (TOS)

ACE0121)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-108

SENSOR (CART)

1) Remove the Cover side L sub. Page 5-13 Page 5-13

2) Remove the Cover L. Page 5-13 Page 5-13

3) Remove the Cover tray upper, and then remove the Cover tray. Page 5-15Remove the Cover tray upper, and then remove the Cover tray. Page 5-15

4) Remove the Spring C CT SW, and then remove the Piece CT SW.Remove the Spring C CT SW, and then remove the Piece CT SW.Spring C CT SW, and then remove the Piece CT SW.CT SW, and then remove the Piece CT SW.Piece CT SW.SW.

Spring C CT SW

Piece CT SW



Sensor (CART)

Sensor stopper

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-109

ROLLER RETARD

1) Pull out the Cassette.

2) Remove two Duct cable mounting screws, and then remove the Duct cable.

Duct cable ADG01�2)


4) Remove two Pickup Assy mounting screws, and then remove the Pickup Assy.

Pickup Assy

ADG014)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-110

5) Remove two Retard unit mounting screws, and then remove the Retard unit.

Retard unit

ADG015)

6) Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the Shaft retard.

7) Remove the Guide retard.

Retard ANB01

6)

Base retard

Guide retard

Spring retard

Shaft retard

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-111

8) Remove the plastic ring, and then remove the ROLLER RETARD.

Roller retard

AVA018)

Bracket retard

Note: When you reassemble the Pickup Assy, be sure that the notch of the Shaft-Pickup couples tothe Pickup Assy, be sure that the notch of the Shaft-Pickup couples tothe Pickup Assy correctly. If not, the first paper picked up from that cassette jams. But after thefirst paper jam, the shaft couples to the assy and the paper will not jam after it.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-112

ROLLER PICKUP / ROLLER SEPARATE


2) Remove the Duct cable. Page 5-109

3) Remove the Pickup Assy. Page 5-109

4) Remove the Retard unit. Page 5-110 Procedure 5

5) Remove two Guide A pickup mounting screws, and then remove the Guide A pickup.

6) Remove four Cover pickup mounting screws, and then remove the Cover pickup.

Cover pickupGuide A pickup

AFF016)

ADG016)

ADG015)


8) Remove two Bearings, and then remove the Roller pickup unit.

AVA01�7)

AVA01�7)

BearingRoller pickup unit

Bearing

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-113

REMOVING THE ROLLER SEPARATE


2) Remove the Feeler.

3) Remove the Spring and the Collar from the Bracket.

4) Remove the Roller separator unit.

AVA011)

AVA011)

Collar separate

Feller

Roller separate unit Spring

Bracket

5) Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the ROLLER SEPARATE.

AVA015)

Roller separate

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-114

REMOVING THE ROLLER PICKUP


2) Remove two Bearings.

3) Remove the Roller pickup unit.

AVA011)

AVA011)

Bearing

Bearing

Roller pickup unit

4) Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the ROLLER PICKUP.

AVA014)

Roller pickup

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-115

SENSOR (PES)




4) Remove the Retard unit. Page 5-110

5) Remove the Guide A pickup. Page 5-112

6) Remove the Cover pickup. Page 5-112




Sensor (PES)

Feller Sensor stopper

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-116

SENSOR (LIFT UP)




4) Remove the Retard unit. Page 5-110 Procedure 5

5) Remove the Guide A pickup. Page 5-112



NOTE: Push down the Pickup unit, and then remove the SENSOR.


Sensor (Lift up)

Sensor stopper

Pickup unit

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-117

SENSOR (PSIZE)



3) Remove two Sensor mounting screws, and then remove the SENSOR.


Sensor (Psize)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-118

ROLLER FEED


2) Remove the Cassette.



5) Remove the Sensor (PSIZE). Page 5-117

6) Remove one Holder cassette screw.

ADG01�6)


8) Remove the Frame drive A. Page 5-81

9) Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the bearing.

10) Remove two plastic rings, and then remove the bearing.11) Remove one Holder casette screw.

Gear 17 0.8 ONEWAY

AVA01�9)

AVA01�10)

Bearing

AFF01�11)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-119

12) Remove the Holder cassette R with the Roller feed.

Holder cassette R

13) Remove one plastic ring.

14) Remove the bearing, and then remove the ROLLER FEED.

Roller feed

Bearing

AVA01�13)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-120

FILTER OZONE

1) Remove the Cover side L Sub. Page 5-13


3) Remove the Cover tray upper, and then remove the Cover tray. Page 5-15

4) Remove the FILTER OZONE.

Filter ozone

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-121

CASE DUST

1) Open the Cover front.


3) Remove the Fuser unit. Page 5-85

4) Remove two Case dust screws.

AFF01�4)

5) Remove the Case dust over the projection.

Case dust

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-122

5.2.5 OPTION CASSETE

COVER REAR

1. Remove four Cover rear mounting screws, and then remove the COVER REAR.

Cover rear

AFF01�1)

PCB CASSETTE

1) Remove the Cover rear. Page 5-122

2) Disconnect all the connectors from the machine.

3) Remove two PCB CASSETTE mounting screws, and then remove the PCB CASSETTE.

PCB cassette

ADG01�3)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-123

MOTOR


2) Remove one connector.

3) Remove two Motor mounting screws, and then remove the MOTOR.

Motor

ACE013)

MOTOR BRACKET



3) Remove three Motor bracket mounting screws, and then remove the MOTOR BRACKET.

Motor bracket

ADG01

3)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-124

CLUTCH




AVA012)

Clutch

FRAME DRIVE



3) Remove three screws, and then remove the FRAME DRIVE.

Frame drive

ADG013)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-125

SHAFT ROLLER FEED



3) Remove the Frame drive. Page 5-124

4) Remove one plastic ring, and then remove one Gear.

5) Remove one plastic ring, and then remove one Bearing.

6) Open the Cover jam, release two hooks, and then remove the Cover jam.

7) Remove the plastic ring, and then slide the bearing to the left, and then remove the SHAFTROLLER FEED.

AVA01�5)

AVA01�7)

AVA01�4)

Bearing

Bearing

Cover jamShaft roller feed

Gear 16

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-126

ROLLER RETARD


2) Remove two Duct cable clamping screws, and then remove the Duct cable.

Duct cable

ADG01�2)

3) Open the Cover jam.


5) Remove two Pickup Assy mounting screws, and then remove the Pickup Assy.

Pickup Assy

Cover jam

ADG015)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-127

6) Remove two Retard unit mounting screws, and then remove the Retard unit.

Retard unit

ADG016)

7) Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the Shaft retard.

8) Remove the Guide retard.

Retard ANB01

7)

Base retard

Guide retard

Spring retard

Shaft retard

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-128

9) Remove the plastic ring, and then remove the ROLLER RETARD.

Roller retard

AVA019)

Bracket retard

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-129

ROLLER PICKUP / ROLLER SEPARATE





5) Remove four Cover pickup mounting screws, and then remove the Cover pickup.

Cover pickup

AFF015)

ADG01�5)


7) Remove two Roller pickup unit mounting screws, and then remove the Roller pickup unit.

AVA01�6)

AVA01�6)

BearingRoller pickup unit

Bearing

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-130

REMOVING THE ROLLER SEPARATOR



3) Remove the Spring and the Collar from the Bracket.

4) Remove the Roller separator unit.

AVA011)

AVA011)

Collar separate

Feller

Roller separate unit Spring

Bracket

5) Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the ROLLER SEPARATOR.

AVA015)

Roller separate

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-131

REMOVING THE ROLLER PICKUP


2) Remove two bearings.

3) Remove the Roller pickup unit.

AVA011)

AVA011)

Bearing

Bearing

Roller pickup unit

4) Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the ROLLER PICKUP.

AVA014)

Roller pickup

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-132

SENSOR (PES)









Sensor (PES)

Feller Sensor stopper

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-133

SENSOR (LIFT UP)







NOTE: Push down the Pickup unit, and then remove the SENSOR.


Sensor (Lift up)

Sensor stopper

Pickup unit

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-134

SENSOR (FEED)





NOTE: When removing the Sensor, raise the Feeler.


Sensor stopper

Sensor (Feed)

Feeler

SENSOR (J-OP)






Sensor (J-OP)

Sensor stopper

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-135

SENSOR (PSIZE)



3) Remove two Sensor mounting screws, and then remove the SENSOR.


Sensor (Psize)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-136

5.3 Adjustment

5.3.1 Outline of printer registration adjustment1. Adjust the printer registration of the first cassette.

2. Adjust the scan position and zoom for ADF and FBS.

3. After performing step1 and 2, adjust printer position for each cassette.

5.3.2 Printer registration modeThis mode adjusts the print registration for each paper source.

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <4>, <3>.

2. Select “Vertical registration” or “Horizontal registration” and press [Enter].

3. To adjust the vertical registration, go to step 4.To adjust the horizontal registration, select the paper source, and press [Enter].

4. Adjust the printer registration:For example:

When you set “+12.3” for Vertical registration, the printing image moves 12.3 mm downward. If you set“–12.3”, the printing image moves 12.3 mm upward.

When you set “+12.3” for Horizontal registration, the printing image moves 12.3 mm rightward. If youset “”–12.3”, the printing image moves 12.3 mm leftward. You can adjust between ”–12.7 mm” and“+12.7 mm”.

To adjust the registration to minus (-), press [-].

5. Press [Enter] to save the settings.

6. To return to the standby, press <Reset>.

Note: If you adjust the printer registration using this mode, the value entered by the machine parameter will

also be overwritten.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-137

Printer registration (top)

A

A

Ladder patern

Adjust so that width A on the test pattern Checkered output falls within the following range.

Standard Setting Range

10 ± 1.9 (mm)-12.7 to 12.7 (mm)

(0.1 mm step)

Adjustment procedure

1. Load A3 size paper to the cassette.

2. Use the Unique Switch 52 to adjust the printing margin to 0 mm. (bit 0, 1 0)

3. Printout the test pattern “Ladder”. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, [Enter], select “Ladder” andpress [Enter].)

4. Check width A on the test pattern Ladder meets the specifications.If width A falls outside the specified range, perform following steps to make the adjustment.

5. To use the “Printer registration mode,” press <Menu>, <*>, <4>, <3>.

6. Refer to the last page and adjust the registration.

7. After you have finished the adjustment, you must reenter the setting of Unique Switch 52, youchanged in step 2.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-138

Printer registration (side)

A

A

Ladder pattern

Adjust so that width A on the test pattern Checkered output falls within the following range.

Standard Adjustment Tool Setting Range

10 ± 2.3 (mm)Machine parameter: 100, 120, 140, 160

110, 130, 150, 170

–12.7 to 12.7 (mm)(0.6773 mm step)


1. Load A3 size paper to the cassette.

2. Use the Unique Switch 52 to adjust the printing margin to 0 mm. (bit 0, 1 0)

3. Printout the test pattern “Ladder”. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, [Enter], select “Ladder” andpress [Enter].)

4. Check width A on the test pattern Ladder meets the specifications.If width A falls outside the specified range, perform following steps to make the adjustment.

5. To use the “Printer registration mode,” press <Menu>, <*>, <4>, <3>.

6. Refer to the last page and adjust the registration.


Important: The setting you have entered in Printer registration mode is reflected in the followingMachine parameters.

Cassette1 : Machine parameter 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170

Cassette2 : Machine parameter 101, 111, 121, 131, 141, 151, 161, 171Cassette3 : Machine parameter 102, 112, 122, 132, 142, 152, 162, 172

Cassette4 : Machine parameter 103, 113, 123, 133, 143, 153, 163, 173

Bypass Tray : Machine parameter 107, 117, 127, 137, 147, 157, 167, 177

Dupex printing : Machine parameter 108, 128

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-139

5.3.3 Registration adjustment

FBS registration (top)

1 . 4

0

1 . 2

5

1 . 0

0

0 . 7

5

0 . 5

5 0 . 3 0

0 .2 5

0 .2 0

0 .1 5

0 .1 0 Test Chart

AEdge of the paper

Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the 1st cassette

and FBS zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made.


10 ± 2.4 (mm) Machine parameter: 018–4.36～ 4.36 (mm)

(0.141 mm step)

Adjustment procedure 1. Load A3 size paper to the 1st cassette.

2. Use the Unique Switch 52 to adjust the printing margin to 0 mm. (bit 0, 1 0))

3. Place the Muratec Test Chart No. 2000-02 on the FBS glass.

4. Make a copy of it in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification.

5. Check that the difference of width A and the copy of A (A’) meets the specifications.If the difference falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjust-ment.

6. Enter Machine Parameter mode. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <0>)

7 Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 018 to meet the specification.If the width A is shorter than the standard, decrease value.If the width A is longer than the standard, increase value.


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-140

FBS registration (side)

1 .

4 0

1 . 2

5

1 . 0

0

0 .

7 5

0 .

5 5

0 . 3 0

0 .2 5

0 .2 0

0 .1 5

0 .1 0

Test Chart

A

Edge ofthe paper


and FBS zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made.


10 ± 2.7 (mm) Machine parameter: 015 – 5.29～ 5.29 (mm)(mm)(0.2116 mm step)



3. Place the Muratec Test Chart No. 2000-02 on the FBS glass.



6. Enter Machine Parameter mode. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <0>)7. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 015 to meet the specification.

If the width A is shorter than the standard, increase value.If the width A is longer than the standard, decrease value.


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-141

ADF registration (top)

1 . 4

0

1 . 2

5

1 . 0

0

0 . 7

5

0 . 5

5 0 . 3 0

0 .2 5

0 .2 0

0 .1 5

0 .1 0 Test Chart

AEdge of the paper


and ADF zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made.


20 ± 3.0 (mm) Machine parameter: 013–10.76～ 10.76 (mm)(0.084 7x 2 mm step)



3. Place the Muratec Test Chart No. 2000-15 A3 on the ADF.




7. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 013 to meet the specification.If the width A is shorter than the standard, decrease value.

If the width A is longer than the standard, increase value.8. After you have finished the adjustment, you must reenter the setting of Unique Switch 52, you

changed in step 2.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-142

ADF registration (bottom)

Test Chart

No.200-15 A3

A

2000-15




15 ± 3.0 (mm) Machine parameter: 014–10.67～ 10.67 (mm)(0.0847 x 2 mm step)



3. Place the Muratec Test Chart No. 2000-15 A3 on the ADF.4. Make a copy of it in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification.



7. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 014 to meet the specification.If the width A is shorter than the standard, decrease value.If the width A is longer than the standard, increase value.


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-143

ADF registration (side)

1 .

4 0

1 . 2

5

1 . 0

0

0 .

7 5

0 .

5 5

0 . 3 0

0 .2 5

0 .2 0

0 .1 5

0 .1 0

Test Chart

A

Edge ofthe paper




20 ± 3.3 (mm) Machine parameter: 010 – 5.29～ 5.29 (mm)(mm)(0.2116 mm step)






6. Enter Machine Parameter mode. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <0>)7. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 010 to meet the specification.

If the width A is shorter than the standard, decrease value.If the width A is longer than the standard, increase value.


7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-144

5.3.4 Zoom adjustmentFBS zoom adjustment (Vertical)


have been made.

Zoom ratio Standard Adjustment Tool Setting Range

100 %330 ± 2.0 (mm)

(330 ± 0.6 %)Machine parameter: 435

– 1.5 to 1.5 %(0.1 % step)

Adjustment procedure 1. Load A3 size paper to the first cassette.

2. Place the Muratec Test Chart No. 2000-15 A3 on the FBS.

3. Make two copies on paper in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification.

4. Measure the length of A on the second copy to find the difference.If length A falls outside the standard range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment.


6. Adjust so that the setting of Machine Parameter 435 meets the specification.If length A is shorter than the standard, increase value.If length A is longer than the standard, decrease value.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-145

FBS zoom adjustment (Horizontal)


have been made.


100 %240 ± 1.4 (mm)

(240 ± 0.6 %)Machine parameter: 016

– 1.5 to 1.5 %(0.1 % step)


1. Load A3 size paper to the first cassette.2. Place the Muratec Test Chart No. 2000-15 A3 on the FBS.


4. Measure the length of A on the second copy to find the difference.If length A falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment.


6. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 016 to meet the specification.If the length A is shorter than the standard, increase value.If the length A is longer than the standard, decrease value.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-146

ADF zoom adjustment (Vertical)

Note: Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the 1st

cassette have been made.


100 % ± 1.0 % Machine parameter: 430– 6.3 to 6.3 %(0.1 % step)






6. Adjust so that the setting of Machine Parameter 430 meets the specification.If the length A is shorter than the standard, increase value.If the length A is longer than the standard, decrease value.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-147

ADF zoom adjustment (Horizontal)


have been made.


100 % ± 1.0 % Machine parameter: 011– 1.5 to 1.5 %(0.1 % step)


2. Place the Muratec Test Chart No. 2000-15 A3 in the ADF.




6. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 011 to meet the specification.

If the length A is shorter than the standard, increase value.

If the length A is longer than the standard, decrease value.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-148

5.3.5 Separation pressure adjustmentAdjust the separation pressure using a screwdriver.

Rotate the screw by half-turn.

Rotate direction Separation pressure

Clockwise Up

Counterclockwise Down

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-149

5.3.6 ADF skew adjustment

Adjust the resist roller by changing the position of the holder resister.

1. Remove the Guide Outer A and take out the Holder Resister.

Guide Outer A

Holder Register

2. Reattach the Holder Resister with its direction up-side-down.

Direction A

Direction B

Normal

positionAdjustment

position

3. Loosen the screw of the Holder Resister and adjust its position.Tighten the screw after the adjustment.

When the Holder Resister is moved to direction A: The Copies will rotate to the clockwise direction.

When the Holder Resister is moved to direction B: The Copies will rotate to the counterclockwisedirection.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


5-150

5.3.7 Drum ATDC adjustment

Important : When the Main PCB is replaced or All RAM Clear is performed for other reasons, theATDC value and drum life should be reentered.

Note : Before replacing the Main PCB or perform the All RAM Clear operation, be sure to see the LifeMonitor to write down the machine condition. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9> and press [Enter])For more information about Life Monitor see section 3, "Life Monitor".

1. After the All RAM clear operation (when the machine is restarted), the following message will be

displayed.

2. Press either [Manual] or [Auto].

3. If you have pressed [Auto], wait about six minutes until the machine adjust the ATDC value itself.When the adjustment is over, go to step 10.

4. If you have pressed [Manual] the following screen will be displayed:

5. Select “ASTD” and press [Enter].

6. Enter the ASTD value, and press [Enter].

7. Select “DeltaVCONT” and press [Enter].

8. Enter the DeltaVCONT value, and press [Enter].

9. Press [Close] to exit the mode.

10. Enter the life monitor value using the Life Monitor Maintenance mode. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>,<Menu>, <*>, <2>,<0> and enter the values.) For more information about Life Monitor Maintenance mode, see section3.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


6-1

6 Section 6 OptionsCAUTION: This installation should be done by a qualified service technician.

6.1 Paper cassetteThe way to attach the second cassette to the MFP, and the third or fourth cassette to the seccond or

the third is almost the same.

Here the procedures are explained with the second cassette attaching to the MFP.

Note: Do not lift the machine by using anything other than the handles. Doing so may damage theunit.

6.1.1 Packaging contents:1. Optional paper cassette ................................... 1

2. Fixing plates .................................................... 4

3. Screws ............................................................ 8

4. Paper size label .............................................. 1

5. Installation Instruction ...................................... 1

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


6-2

6.1.2 Installation

1. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord.

2. Set the machine on top of the optional cassette.(To attach the third cassette or fourth cassette to the second or third cassette, set it on the counter-part.)

Option cassette

3. Remove four screws and the Cover Rear of the optional cassette.4. Remove one screw and the Plate Printer C from the MFP back side.

5. Slide the harness through the machine and attach the connector of the PCB Main (P23).

Cover rear

Plate printer C

Harness

ADG01 �

3)

ADG01�4)

ADG01 �

3)

ADG01 �

3)

ADG01 �

3)

*Attaching the third cassette or fourth cassette to the second or third cassette.

Option cassette (3rd)

Option cassette (2nd)

Cover rear (3rd)

Cover rear (2nd)

Harness

6. Reattach the covers removed in steps 3 and 4.

Note: Make sure the harness is not wedged into the machine.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


6-3

7. Open the first cassette and attach the fixing plates on both ends of the machine using each twoscrews.

8. Attach the fixing plates on the backside of the machine on both ends using each two screws.

Fixture

ADG01�

7)

ADG01�8)

9. Open the paper cassette and load the paper into the cassette.

10. Adjust the rear and side paper guides to the paper.

11. Turn the paper size dial to indicate the paper size.

12. Close the cassette.

13. Plug the power cord and turn on the machine.

14. If you have set the dial to “Others” in step 11, press <Menu>, <3>, [Enter] and select “Other paper”and press [Enter]. Select the cassette you are going to set the paper size, press [Enter], select thepaper size and press [Enter].

15. Apply the correct paper size label and the cassette number label to the cassette.

The paper size labels are supplied with the optional cassette. The cassette number label is suppliedwith the MFP.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


6-4

6.2 Conformation StampAbout 30,000 times stamp is available with blue ink stamp, 10,000 times with pink ink stamp.

6.2.1 Packaging contents:1. Stamp solenoid ................................................ 1

2. Stamp .............................................................. 1

3. Screw............................................................... 14. Installation Instruction ...................................... 1

6.2.2 Installation

1. Open the cover platen.

2. Peel off the left side of the Sheet document press.


3. Turn the Bracket stamp out and attach the stamp solenoid using one screw.

4. Connect the harness to the connector.

Solenoid

Bracket stamp AFF01

3)

5. Remove the stamp cap from the stamp and insert it to the solenoid.

6. Turn the stamp unit back to the platen cover.

7. Reattach the Sheet document press.8. Close the platen cover.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


6-5

6.3 Page Counter

The mechanical counter shows the total number of pages the machine has printed.

Note: This device counts up to 999,999 pages. If more pages are printed, the counter resets to zeroand begins counting the new pages from that point.

6.3.1 Packaging contents:

1. Mechanical counter .....................................1

2. Installation Instruction. Installation Instruction ...................................1

6.3.2 Installation


2. Open the front cover.

3. Use nippers and open the cover.

4. Pull out the harness and connect it to the counter.5. Tuck the harness into toe machine and set the counter to the opening.

6. Close the front cover.

Counter

The counter will now count the number of pages printed.count the number of pages printed.pages printed.pages printed.printed..

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


6-6

6.4 PCL printer controller

6.4.1 Packaging contents:1. PCL printer board .........................................1

2. PCB Joint......................................................1

3. PCB spacer ..................................................1

4. Stud spacers.................................................25. Spacers ........................................................4

6. Screw .............................................................. 5

7. Soft key laber .................................................. 1

8. Setup Disk. Setup Disk ....................................................... 1 (Contains PCL and TWAIN drivers and manuals)(Contains PCL and TWAIN drivers and manuals)Contains PCL and TWAIN drivers and manuals)ontains PCL and TWAIN drivers and manuals)and manuals)and manuals)


6.4.2 Installation

1. Turn the power off and unplug the power cord.

2. If the machine has an ADF, remove one screw and plate printer B. Otherwise go to step 4.

3. Disconnect one connector.

4. Remove eleven screws and the plate printer A.

5. Attach one PCB spacer.

6. Attach two stud spacers.

7. Attach the PCL printer board and screw it using three screws.

PCL PCB

Stud spacer PCB spacer

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


6-7

8. Attach two spacers to the Main PCB.

9. Attach two spacers to the PCL printer board.

10. Attach the Joint PCB to the PCL printer board and Main PCB, and screw it using two screws.

11. Reattach the parts that was removed in steps 2 to 4.

*Use the enclosed CD to install the print drivers.

PCB joint

ADA027)

Spacer

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


6-8

6.5 OfficeBridge Expansion kit


1. OfficeBridge board........................................1

2. Spacers ........................................................23. Screws ..........................................................4

4. Soft key label ...............................................1

5. Caution label for power off ...........................1

6. Setup Disk ....................................................1 (Contains OfficeBridge programs and manuals)Contains OfficeBridge programs and manuals)ontains OfficeBridge programs and manuals)and manuals)and manuals)

7. Installation InstructionInstallation Instruction ...................................1

Note: To connect the machine to the network a 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX LAN cable (Category 5)is required.

6.5.2 Installation





5. Remove two screws and Cover side L Sub.

6. Use nippers to punch out the cover for network connection.

7. Reattach the Cover side L Sub.

ADA03�2)

Cover side L sub

8. Attach two spacers to the PCB Main.

9. Attach the OfficeBridge board and screw it using four screws.

ADA026)

ADA026)

Spacer

Network Interface Board

PCB main

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


6-9

10. Reattach the parts that was removed in steps 2 to 4.

11. Attach the caution label at the power switch.

*Refer to the setup guide how to set up OfficeBridge.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


6-10

6.6 Network Interface Board6.6.1 Packaging contents:

1. Network Interface Board ..............................1

2. Spacers ........................................................2

3. Screws ..........................................................4

4. Installation Instruction ...................................1

Note: To connect the machine to the network a 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX LAN cable (Category 5) isrequired.

6.6.2 Installation





5. Remove two screws and Cover side L Sub.

6. Use nippers to punch out the cover for network connection.

7. Reattach the Cover side L Sub.

ADA03�2)

Cover side L sub

8. Attach two spacers to the PCB Main.

9. Attach the Network Interface Board and screw it using four screws.

ADA026)

ADA026)

Spacer

Network Interface Board

PCB main

10. Reattach the parts that was removed in steps 2 to 4.11. Connect one end of a LAN cable to the Network Interface Board.

12. Plug the other end of the LAN cable into the 10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet hub.

13. Plug the power cord and turn the power on. Go ahead to the “Network settings”.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


6-11

Network Settings

To use the machine on a network, set the IP address and Subnet mask on the machine.

There are two ways of settings according to the network environment:

• Automatic setup; If a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server is installed onyour network, the IP address and Subnet mask is assign automatically tothe machine when the machine is turned.

Important: Once the DHCP server has assigned the IP address to yourmachine, that IP address MUST be reserved within the specificDHCP scope. Failure to do so could result in failed operationwhen the IP address lease expires.

• Manual setup ; If a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server is NOT installedon your network, see the steps below and set up the IP address and Sub-net mask.1. Press <Menu>, <7>, <2>, <3> and [Enter].2. If the password is registred, enter the password and press [Enter].

Otherwise, go to step 3.

3. Select “IP Address” and press [Enter].

4. Select “DHCP Setting” and press [Enter].

5. Select “Off” and press [Enter].6. Select “IP address” and press [Enter].7. Enter the IP address using the numeric keys and press [Enter].8. Select “Subnet mask” and press [Enter].9. Enter the Subnet mask using the numeric keys and press [Enter].

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


6-12

6.7 Scanner heater


1. Scanner heater ............................................1

2. Sheet heater .................................................13. Screw ............................................................1


6.7.2 Installation





5. Remove the Cover platen.

6. Remove the Cover left top and Cover right top.

7. Remove the Cover size H and Cover back top.

Left top cover

Right top cove

Size H cover

Back top cover

8. Remove the Pane.

9. Attach the scanner heater using one screw.

10. Remove one screw from the Supporter FPC and thread the harness of the heater under the sup-porter.

11. Thread the harness through the opening in the machine frame.

Heater

Tape

Supporter FPC

AFF01�8)

AFF01�9)

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


6-13

12. Connect the harness to the Scanner PCB (P149).

P149

PCB Scanner

13. Reattach the screw that was removed in step 8.

14. Reattach all the covers and the pane that were removed.

15. Put the Sheet document on the bottom side of the FBS.

Heater sheet

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


6-14

6.8 Cassette heater


1. Heater ............................................................. 1

2. AC Inlet ........................................................... 1

3. AC power ........................................................ 1

4. Chassis cover ................................................. 1

5. Screw (A) ........................................................ 1

6. Screw (B) ........................................................ 1

7. Cable Ties ...................................................... 1

8. Label ............................................................... 1

9. Installation Instruction ..................................... 1

12

4 7 8 95 63

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


6-15

6.8.2 Installation


2. Open the rear cover of the second, third or fourth cassette.

3. Open the left cover of the second, third or fourth cassette.

4. Attach the chassis cover to the cassette-chassis using two screws (screw A).

A A

5. Insert the heater from the rear side of the cassette. Make sure that the heater mounts on the cas-sette-chassis on the front side of the casette.

6. Attach the heater using one screw (screw A) from the front side of the cassette.

7. Attach the heater using two screws (screw A) from the rear side of the cassette.

7/23/2019 MFX-2200 & MFX-2700


8. Attach the AC inlet to the cassette-chassis using two screws (screw A).

A

A

9. Attach the cable ties to the cassette-chassis.

10. Attach the ground wire to the cassette-chassis using one screw (screw B).

B

11. Connect the connectors.

12. Tie the cable to the cable tie and cut the rest of the ties off.

13. Use nippers to punch out the cover for AC inlet and reattach the cover.